JP7283505B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines , there is known a gaming machine in which light incident on a light transmitting member is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member (Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-29735 A

However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the incidence of light on the light transmitting member.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of improving the incidence of light on a light transmitting member.

To achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 comprises a light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light transmitting member with light. wherein the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface is closer to the front side than the front surface of the light transmitting member. is positioned along the outer edge of the light-transmitting member ; In the display area, which is an area that is not blocked by the front member when viewed from the front, the light transmission member is visible when viewed from the front, and the outer edge member is arranged such that the light emitted from the light irradiation means to the outer edge member is outside the display area. wherein at least part of the outer edge member is arranged closer to the light irradiation means than the side end surface of the light transmission member in a front view, and the light irradiation means and the light A predetermined gap is formed between the transmissive member.

According to the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to improve the incidence of light on the light transmission member.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the displacement unit; FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member; FIG. 10 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member and the right displacement member; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit; Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; FIG. 20 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; 22 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21; FIG. Fig. 2 is a front view of the displacement unit in the first embodiment; 24 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 23; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the displacement unit in the second aspect; 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 25; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of a displacement unit in a third aspect; 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 27; FIG. 4 is a front view of the projection unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the projection unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. It is a front view of a back base. FIG. 4B is a rear view of the front base and the illumination unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the front base; 35 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34; FIG. 4 is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member and groove forming member; FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, gear member and groove forming member taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. 37; FIG. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). (a) to (c) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit, and (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). 44(a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 44(b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit taken along line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 44(b). (a) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block taken along line XLVIb-XLVIb of FIG. 46(a), and (c) is a front view of the second block. and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block taken along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit in a second position; FIG. 4B is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the first position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in an intermediate position; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit in the second position; (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the intermediate position, and (c) is the transmission in the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (a) to (c) are rear views of a transmission gear and a connecting member in the first drive range. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXa-LIXa of FIG. 54, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 57 is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXc-LIXc of FIG. 56; FIG. 60(a) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the second embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. 64(a) is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. (a) is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and (b) is a projection plate along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a); FIG. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit. (a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit near the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit near the second block. FIG. 11 is a front view of a projection unit in a fifth embodiment; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. Fig. 10 is a rear view of the front base; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the projection unit; (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (a) is a front view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the third state. (a) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. FIG. 21 is a front view of a projection unit in a sixth embodiment; FIG. 3 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the front base with the front base and the irradiation unit assembled. (a) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. It is a front view of the game board in the seventh embodiment. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a base plate, a winning opening unit and a ball throwing unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a back view of the winning opening unit. (a) is a perspective front view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of the prize winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the prize winning opening unit. (a) is a front view of the front unit, and (b) is a rear view of the front unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a front unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a front unit. . (a) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a side view of the displacement member, and (c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member. 87B is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87B is a rear view of the winning opening unit and the displacement member in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). FIG. (a) is a side view of the drive unit, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a drive unit. 93(a) and 93(b) are sectional views of the drive unit taken along line XCVI--XCVI in FIG. 93(b). FIG. 84 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVII-XCVII in FIG. 83; 97(a) and (b) are sectional views of the winning opening unit taken along line XCVIII--XCVIII in FIG. (a) is a front view of a specific winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the specific winning opening unit, and (c) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a specific prize winning opening unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of a specific winning opening unit 950; 99(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the specific winning opening unit taken along line CII-CII in FIG. 99(c). (a) and (b) are perspective front views of a specific winning slot unit. (a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit taken along line CIVb-CIVb of FIG. 104(a). (a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit, and (b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit and the driving unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit and the drive unit along the CVIa-CVIa line in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the drive unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of a ball-throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the ball-throwing unit. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit. (a) is a front view of a sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit; 112(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit along line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). 112(a) and 112(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the sorting unit in range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). (a) is a front view of a passageway unit, and (b) is a side view of the passageway unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the passageway unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit; (a) is a front view of the replaceable unit, and (b) is a rear view of the replaceable unit. 117(a) is a cross-sectional view of the replaceable unit along line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 117(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the replaceable unit along line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 118(a). FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CXIX-CXIX in FIG. 81; (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line CXXb-CXXb of FIG. 120(a). It is a rear view of a front unit and a displacement member in an 8th embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a drive unit and in a ninth embodiment. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a drive unit and a displacement member in a tenth embodiment. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective rear view of a rear base and a displacement member in an eleventh embodiment; (a) and (b) are rear views of a front unit and a displacement member. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective rear view of a rear base and a displacement member in a twelfth embodiment; (a) and (b) are rear views of a front unit and a displacement member. (a) is a rear view of the front unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line CXXIXb-CXXIXb of FIG. 129(a). 130(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line CXXXb-CXXXb of FIG. 130(a). 131(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line CXXXIb-CXXXIb of FIG. 131(a). (a) is a side view of a drive unit according to a fifteenth embodiment, (b) is a top view of the drive unit, and (c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board along line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133(a). (a) is a sectional view of a game board in a sixteenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a game board in a seventeenth embodiment. 135(a) is a schematic rear view of the winning opening unit in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit taken along line CXXXVb-CXXXVb of FIG. 135(a). 136(a) is a schematic view of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). 137(a) is a schematic diagram of the winning opening unit viewed from the rear, and (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning opening unit 930 taken along line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137(a).

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. and an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided serves as an opening and closing axis. A frame 4 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported toward the front side so that they can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16. - 特許庁

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front door 5 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front door 5 (for example, at corners). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The indicator lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of indicating whether prize balls are being dispensed and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right side electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is released in accordance with the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing probability, shortening the working hours, or normal, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of changing by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in normal mode, it means that the game is in a state where the probability is not variable or the time is short (the jackpot probability and the second symbol winning probability are not increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second prize winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than during normal. Time is set. When the first electric role product 140a is in the open state (open state), compared to the case where the first electric role product 140a is in the closed state (closed state) The ball will be in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit , the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to increase more than during normal operation. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric role product is opened at the time when the first electric role product 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and one hit. At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time when the first electric role product 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric role product 140a and the second electric role product 82 are opened at one time. It is also possible to change only the winning probability of the second symbol so as to be higher than in the normal state, without changing the number of times of winning.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, with the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 (start winning) as a trigger, the third A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays a variable pattern, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is to perform a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the first electric role object 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player more chances of opening the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a for one hit, etc. The second winning opening during the probability change or time reduction When the state is such that the ball can easily enter 140 and the third winning hole, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 . The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less or 5 or more times (e.g., 8 times). . Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning hole 140. - 特許庁The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. there is On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. It becomes an open state (expanded state), and the state is such that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 140 .

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ , and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning port 140 during the variable probability or the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a like the second prize winning port 140, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 140 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hitting”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to set the first electric accessory 140a in an open state and to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. The first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit so as to form a pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out hole 71. be. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In main controller 110, MPU 201 performs main processing of pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display result in second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include respective drive motors 481 , 491 , 661 , 880 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the action unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit 200. FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions. 400, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the motion unit 200 includes a box-shaped rear case 300, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are placed in the inner space of the rear case 300. housed in order.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301. Through the opening 301a, a third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the rear surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible. It is possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a frame-shaped base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a base member 410 which are displaceably arranged on the base member 410. The left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projection member 485 are retracted to the back side of the projection unit 600, and the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third pattern display device). 81) can be displaced between the projecting position projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485), By selecting the driving means to drive, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be varied (a plurality of types of displacement modes can be formed). Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape in front of the displacement unit 400 , a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged inside the base member 610 , and a projection plate member 620 . It includes a plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 . The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

In this case, the projection unit 600 employs a structure that enhances the efficiency of incidence of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 onto the projection plate member 620, and intensifies the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns and designs). clearly emerge). Also, a structure is adopted that enhances workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation units 650 ) to the base member 610 . Details of these structures will be described later.

The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 which are arranged above the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. , the other end side of the displacement member 850 can be displaced between a retracted position above the opening 301a (that is, the third pattern display device 81) of the rear case 300 and a projecting position projecting toward the front side. (See FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a biasing spring SP that biases the displacement member 850. At a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the biasing spring SP By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) around the balanced position (predetermined position) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The displacement unit 400 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 9-28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400. FIG.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and displacement members (a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420L) displaceably disposed on the base member 410. member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) driving means (lower driving mechanism 480 and upper driving mechanism 490) for applying driving force to the displacement member. When displacing the displacement member by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when displacing the displacement member by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or when displacing the displacement member by driving the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 491) When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member is formed to be displaced in different manners. The details of the structure will be described below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18. FIG.

First, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R that are formed as displacement members that perform effects by displacement. , the left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the truck member 440, the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is an elongated member arranged in a vertical posture, and includes a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the rear surface, a connecting hole 422 formed at the upper end, and a sliding member formed at the lower end. and a moving groove 423 . The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the rear side of the left displacement member 420L.

The length of the connecting shaft 421 is set so that the tip of the connecting shaft 421 protrudes from the rear surface of the left driven member 430L. 17 and 18). That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421 to displace the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one connecting shaft 441 of two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 described later is rotatably inserted therethrough. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative attitude change (rotation around the axis of the connection hole 422) with respect to the carriage member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a driving pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of a lower left rack 488L, which will be described later, is rotatably and slidably inserted. . Therefore, when only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven while the lower left rack 488L is stopped, or vice versa, the attitude change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410 can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being installed between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L. and a sliding pin 432 protruding from the rear surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The slide pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a slide groove 410 a formed in the side of the base member 410 . Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing the relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The carriage member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extending in the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It comprises two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported on both ends of each connecting shaft 441 . Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the truck member 440 by rolling on the rolling surface of the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440. .

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and each rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 is placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended from the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440 and supported.

The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide extending along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the truck member 440 are rotatably inserted. A rack gear 452 is provided.

Here, the right displacement member 420R, the right driven member 430R, the left driven member 430L, the upper right rack 450R, and the upper left rack 450L are formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, respectively. Since they have substantially the same configuration, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, the upper right rack 450R has a rack gear 452 engraved on its front surface. In addition, the upper right rack 450R is offset to the front side at the portion where the connecting hole 451 is formed, and is arranged in a different position in the front-rear direction from the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. In this case, a pinion gear 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410 is meshed with both rack gears 452 .

Accordingly, as the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slid) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In this embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 interposed between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the number of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is reduced. The displacement direction can be the opposite direction (the direction toward or away from each other). However, an even number of pinion gears 459 may be provided, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be displaced in the same direction.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. FIG.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. FIG. 13 and 14 show a state in which the rear cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the rear cover 412 is removed. 13 to 16, illustration of the raising cover 413 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a driving mechanism with which the pinion gear 482 is meshed. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a protruding member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the rear surface of the protruding member 485, and the rack gear 486. It mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) in which the leading gear 487a is meshed with the gear train, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R that are meshed with the trailing gear 487e of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 projecting from the back of the left front cover 411L. be. The drive gear 483 and the drive arm 484 are rotatably supported on the rear surface of the left front cover 411L and the front surface of the base member 410, respectively.

The drive gear 483 is provided with an eccentric pin 483a that is positioned eccentrically from its center of rotation and that protrudes from its rear surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, A drive pin 484c protrudes from the front at the end opposite to the side where the support hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction through the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first drive motor 481, the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 moves from the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484. By acting on one or the other inner wall surface, the drive arm 484 rotates in the forward or reverse direction around the pivot hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

The protruding member 485 has a linear sliding groove 485a through which the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is arranged in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its extending and retracting direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL includes a base end rail provided on the front surface of the base member 410, a tip rail provided on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and a base end rail interposed between the base end rail and the tip rail. and an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be longitudinally displaceable relative to each other.

Therefore, when the driving arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or down by the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484, the slide rail SL is extended and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is moved to the base. The member 410 is raised and lowered in the vertical direction.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the upward/downward direction of the projecting member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is arranged in a state where the top gear 487a is meshed with the rack gear 486, and the front and right front surfaces of the base member 410. They are rotatably pivotally supported between the rear surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, the linear motion of the rack gear 486 can be used to rotate the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) by moving the protruding member 485 up and down.

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and include a rack gear 488a carved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction, and a drive pin 488b protruding from the front at the longitudinal end. and respectively. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are arranged at different positions in the vertical direction, with the rack gears 488a opposed to each other, and between the rear surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the rear cover 412 in the horizontal direction (width direction). , left-right direction in FIG. 19).

A gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to an adjacent gear 487d, and protrudes rearward through an opening 410b formed in the base member 410 to form a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488L. It meshes with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) rotates as the protruding member 485 moves up and down, the rotation of the gear 487a at the end of the gear train causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to mutually move. They can be linearly moved in opposite directions (towards or away from each other).

The driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R protrude to the front side through linear insertion grooves 410c drilled in the base member 410, and as described above, the left displacement member 420L. and the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R so as to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the truck member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R, which will be described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG.

17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. FIG. 17 and 18, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are shown between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a driving mechanism with which the pinion gear 492 is meshed. It mainly comprises a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 which together with the drive gear 493 form a crank mechanism.

The upper portion of the base member 410 (the upper side portion formed in a substantially picture frame shape when viewed from the front) is formed as a divided structure in which an upper rear portion 410e, an upper intermediate portion 410f, and a front portion 410g are sequentially superimposed on the front side. be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of the upwardly projecting portion of the upper intermediate portion 410f. 492 is attached (fixed). A drive gear 493 and a drive arm 494 are rotatably journalled to the rear surface of the upper intermediate portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 is provided with an eccentric pin 493a located eccentrically from the center of rotation thereof and protruding from the rear surface. The drive arm 494 includes a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and It has a linear drive groove 494c located at the end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction through the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second drive motor 491, the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 moves from the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted upon, the drive arm 494 rotates forward or backward around the pivot hole 494a, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced left and right.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted through the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating about the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c that is displaced to the left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is supported. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced left and right.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is laterally displaced and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) rolls on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L moves to the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. The displacement (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the right displacement member is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459. 420R can be displaced. The rolling surfaces on which the rolling wheels 442 of the truck member 440 roll are formed in the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28. FIG.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). A first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24. FIG.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of displacement unit 400 in the first mode, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are front views of displacement unit 400 in rear view of FIGS. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIGS. and a state in which the protruding member 485 is arranged at the overhang position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the outermost positions (positions farthest apart from each other in the left-right direction), A protruding member 485 is arranged at the bottom.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, the states shown in FIGS. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other in the left-right direction (width direction), and the protruding member 485 is raised to the state (extended position in the first aspect). In the extended position in the first mode, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are combined (the side surfaces of the three members are in close contact with each other).

Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the projection member 485 (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

Further, when the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) and the rack gear 488a (Figs. 16), the driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surfaces of the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, thereby displacing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420L. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction approaching each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 becomes the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. 421. As a result, the truck member 440 rolls on the rolling surface, and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L (the truck member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIGS. 17 and 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, thereby displacing the right displacement member 420R. The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In this embodiment, the amount of displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (the width direction, the left-right direction in FIG. 20) is such that the amount of displacement on the lower end side is smaller than the amount of displacement on the upper end side ( In other words, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is made shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start to displace substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the extended position in the first mode ( 23 and 24) are driven substantially simultaneously. That is, the lateral displacement speed of the upper end side (carriage member 440) is made faster than the lower end side (driving pin 488b).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while being rotated, instead of being non-rotatably displaced in the left-right direction while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to rotate and displace the displacement member in this way with the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. It has become possible for the first time to utilize the driving means of

Further, when the lateral displacement speed of the upper end side (the truck member 440) is different from that of the lower end side (the drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the truck member 440 is changed. Since the driving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending vertically with a length larger than the diameter of the driving pin 488b, it is possible to absorb the change in the distance between the two. That is, there is no need to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b can be formed to be rotatable and slidable, so that the product cost can be reduced and the reliability and durability of the operation can be improved. be able to.

23 and 24, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in directions opposite to those described above, FIGS. 19 and 20 (retracted position), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) away from each other, and the projecting member 485 is lowered.

Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in a non-driving state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, A second mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. Note that FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are also referred to as appropriate in the description of the second mode.

25 is a front view of displacement unit 400 in the second mode, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of displacement unit 400 in rear view of FIG. 25 and 26 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the extended position in the second mode.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state arranged at the retracted position), the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is such that the left displacement member 420L rotates on its upper end side (the axial center of the connection hole 422). It is placed in an attitude that allows it to rotate about its center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), the drive pin of the lower drive arm 484 is driven as shown in FIGS. 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485, so that the protruding member 485 is lifted, and the driving pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R move the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced (linearly moved) in a direction toward each other. That is, in the second mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated around their upper end sides (the axis of the connecting hole 422).

Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in a non-driving state), and the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and A third mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. FIG. Note that FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are also referred to as appropriate in the description of the third mode.

27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third mode, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 as viewed from the rear in FIG. 27 and 28 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the extended position in the third mode.

Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending vertically with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b. Member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 acts on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. Together, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, displacing the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (linear motion).

That is, in the third mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated around their lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side). Further, in the third mode, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the projecting member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

Here, in the conventional game machine, the base member 410 is provided with guide means (for example, a guide groove), and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (trajectory along which the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way. As a result, the effect by displacing the displaceable member is one-pattern, and it is difficult to surprise the player. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (e.g., driving motor) is increased or decreased, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In contrast, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). Thus, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485) can be displaced in three modes (first mode, second mode, and third mode). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one way, the effect is not one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, so that the displacement mode can be switched. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, in the first mode (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be caused to perform displacement dominated by parallel movement (linear motion), whereas in the second mode And in the third aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be caused to rotate (rotational motion) only, and the motion mode of the displacement can be different. can let As a result, it is possible to increase the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member, making it easier to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, there are some conventional products in which the rotation center is kept constant and only the direction of rotation is changed to change the displacement mode. It is not the same rotation center but a different rotation direction, but different rotation directions and different rotation centers (in the second mode, the upper end side is the rotation center, In this case, the lower end side is the center of rotation), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, making it easier to surprise the player.

In addition, in the first mode, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a combination of rotation and parallel movement (linear motion). is the same direction as the direction of rotation in Therefore, in the initial stages of the first mode and the third mode (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize that the displacement members are displaced in the direction of approaching each other. can be hard to hit. On the other hand, in the first mode, the projecting member 485 is lifted as the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the approaching direction, whereas in the third mode, the projecting member 485 is stopped. state can be maintained. That is, in the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction toward each other, if the projecting member 485 is raised, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first mode. Players can be expected to

In the displacement unit 400, a carriage member 440, a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R are arranged (held) on a base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable. The upper end side (connection hole 422) is rotatably connected, and the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is in the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

Thereby, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform linear motion (first mode) including a rotational component and rotational motion (second and third modes). can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove. That is, if the trajectory is curved, not only the mechanism for guiding the members corresponding to the truck member 440, the members corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, but also the members 440, 488R It is necessary to provide a mechanism for continuously applying the driving force to 488L and 488R).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the truck member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can be guided in a straight line, and therefore the truck member 440 can be guided by the rolling surface as a flat surface. , the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize a rack and pinion mechanism, so their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operational reliability.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in any of the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. , One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by rolling of the carriage member 440 on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488L. 488R is guided by sliding (linear motion) between base member 410 and back cover 412 . That is, there is no need to provide different guide mechanisms for each mode, and therefore there is no need to employ a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the operational reliability and durability can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape when viewed from the front, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection plate member 620. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620 , a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620 , and a driving force of the drive motor 661 for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 661 to the projection plate member 620 . and a gear train (gears 662 to 664).

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped rear base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 612 arranged in front of the rear base 611, and is formed between the facing surfaces of the rear base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

Note that the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player in an area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 when viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as a “display area”), and an area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. In (that is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter referred to as "outside the display area"), the projection plate member 620 is invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the player to see the display of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side, and also the irradiation unit 650 emits light. When the incident light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a form of a pattern or design, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are arranged on the rear side and the front side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620 . The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 has a plurality of teeth engraved along its outer peripheral surface, and meshes with a gear 664 at the end of the gear train. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 with a U-shaped cross section that continues in the circumferential direction between itself and the projection plate member 620, and includes a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. By guiding C to the guide groove 641 , the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 . The detailed configurations of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposes the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (five in this embodiment) are arranged in a posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 passes through substantially the center of the projection plate member 620 . The details of the mounting structure of the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is arranged on the rear side of the rear base 611 , and the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is connected (fixed) to the top gear 662 of the gear train. A gear member 630 provided on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, a holding structure for the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. FIG. 33 is a front view of the rear base 611. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33, the rear base 611 includes an inner standing portion 611a erected on the inner edge of the annular plate member and an outer standing portion 611a erected on the outer edge of the annular plate member. A setting portion 611c, an intermediate standing portion 611b standing between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611c, and an inner concave groove in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the inner standing portion 611a. 611d, an outer concave portion 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a restricting projection 611f projecting from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner standing portion 611a is erected from the inner edge portion of the annular plate member toward the front side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 33) and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The outer erected portion 611c is erected from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member toward the front side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 33) and has a constant thickness in the radial direction.

The intermediate erected portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611b. The intermediate upright portion 611b is divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end is connected to the outer upright portion 611c.

The inner recessed groove 611d is a region for arranging the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620, which will be described later, inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. formed by

The outer recessed groove 611e is a region for arranging an irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, inside, and is formed so as to surround the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611c, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. be.

The restricting protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C, which is pivotally supported by the front base 612, from rattling toward the rear side. and formed to protrude on the front side. In addition, in the present embodiment, the regulating projections 611f are formed at six locations at predetermined intervals.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the rear surface of the front base 612, inner standing portions 611a, intermediate standing portions 611b, outer standing portions 611c and restricting projections 611f of the rear base 611 are provided. A set portion 612a, an intermediate erected portion 612b, an outer erected portion 612c, and a shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, when the base member 610 is assembled, the upright end surfaces of the upright portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 overlap the upright end surfaces of the upright portions 611a to 611c of the rear base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted through the restricting protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the rear surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pins 612g are shafts with a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and is a unit for causing the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. are placed. That is, the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by a plurality of irradiation units 650 on its outer peripheral side.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the rear base 611 is superimposed on the rear surface of the front base 612. Thus, it is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both bases 611 and 612 .

36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 36, the intermediate standing portion 612b of the front base 612 is formed with a cutout portion 612b1 having a substantially semicircular shape on the leading end side of the standing portion. Similarly, an approximately semi-circular notch 611b1 is formed at the same phase as the notch 612b1 on the upright distal end side of the intermediate upright portion 611b of the rear base 611 (see FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state in which the upright distal end surfaces of the intermediate upright portions 611b and 612b are superimposed (that is, in the assembled state of the base member 610), the mutual notch portions 611b1 and 612b2 form an approximately circular opening when viewed from the front. be. These circular openings are formed at positions facing each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions with the same phase).

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the cutouts 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b, and is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. be done. In addition, the circular opening is set to have a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651 .

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.

37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of projection plate member 620, gear member 630 and groove forming member 640 taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. In FIG. 38, a virtual line M indicates the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 has a notch portion 621 in a portion of the outer edge and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the regulation projection 611f of the rear base 611, and is formed by cutting out a portion of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line perpendicular to the radial direction. be done.

The reflecting portion 622 is a portion in which the interior of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and the entire area of the projection plate member 620 when viewed from the front is processed into a shape such as a pattern or design. As a result, when the light that has entered the interior of the projection plate member 620 is irradiated onto the reflecting portion 622, the light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the diffusely reflected light, and can visually recognize the shape of the reflecting portion 622 . That is, the shape of the reflecting portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620 by the light being incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620 , is formed from a plate-like body that is annular in front view, and has an outer diameter larger than that of the projection plate member 620 . It is set large and arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back side of the projection plate member 620 (on the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 37), and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 .

The gear member 630 includes a toothed portion 631 carved along the outer peripheral surface, a rear portion 632 on the side surface on the rear side, and an end portion on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the rear portion 632 inclined toward the front side. and a slanted surface portion 633 .

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface with which the gear 664 meshes as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that extends from an end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and that is inclined toward the front side. In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the rear surface portion 632. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ2 between the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (θ1=θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. Also, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Furthermore, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (the upper side in FIG. 38), and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 .

The groove forming member 640 has a side surface portion 641a on one side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b on the other side of the inner portion bent in a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface on the front side. It has a front portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 that is inclined from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) end portion of the front portion 642 toward the rear side.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between facing the front side (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and is spaced apart from the front side plane of the projection plate member 620 by a certain interval around the axis. formed apart.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that rotatably holds the projection plate member 620 by contacting the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620, and the cross section thereof is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. At the same time, it is formed circularly around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can form the guide groove 641 that guides the collar C by being arranged on the projection plate member 620 . That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 .

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuously provided from an end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 and that is inclined toward the rear side. The angle of inclination of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back side is the intersection angle θ3 between the front portion 642 and the imaginary line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ4 between the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (θ3=θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39(a). 40(a) to 40(c) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. FIG. 40(a) to 40(c) illustrate the transition state when attaching the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. FIG. 39 and 40 illustrate a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the projecting portion C1 projecting radially outward is located on the front side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 39(b)). 39(b) lower side) and the side face portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (the guide groove 641).

Also, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is greater than the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. is also set small (L1<L2).

Therefore, in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap therebetween, the projection plate member 620 can rotate vertically and horizontally by the gap. The contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C even if the contact surface 641b is shifted. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be rotated smoothly.

Next, referring to FIG. 40(a) to FIG. 40(c), attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 40(a), the projection plate member 620 is placed on the front base 612 when the collar C is placed on the shaft portion 612f.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612 d of the front base 612 . That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner groove 612d is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640. By arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner groove 612d, the projection plate Member 620 can be positioned and placed.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f on which the collar C is arranged. That is, by aligning the cutout portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the collar C can be arranged on the front base 612 in the state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is such that the back side (the upper side in FIG. 40(a)) is the inner peripheral side (the left side in FIG. 40(a)) with respect to the axis of the shaft portion 612f. It is performed in a state of being tilted to the In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the projecting portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641. As shown in FIG.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(b)) around the tip of the projecting portion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis of the collar C can be arranged concentrically with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40(c), by displacing the collar C to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(c)), the contact between the tip surface of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 are arranged at positions facing each other. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620 , the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641 .

Here, if a groove is formed in the outer edge of a circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are placed inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) to place the collars. Since it is necessary to arrange the collar and both hands are used for assembling, there is a problem that the assembling efficiency is low.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, so that it is not necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the color C as described above. do not have. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the projection unit 600 assembled in this way with the rear base 611 from the rear side.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG.

41(a) to 43(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In addition, in FIG.41(b), FIG.42(b), and FIG.43(b), illustration of a cross-sectional line is abbreviate|omitted in order to make an understanding easy.

41(b), 42(b), and 43(b), the refraction angles when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 are Considered to have no effect on the invention, the light from light source A entering projection plate member 620, gear member 630 and groove forming member 640 is illustrated in an orthogonal manner. Furthermore, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is projected onto the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 620 . Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine (upper side in FIG. 41(b)).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is irradiated to the front or back of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, , the amount of light entering the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or rear side of the projection plate member 620 and traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed from a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The light traveling through the member 620 is projected on the front or back of the projection plate member 620 even when the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It can be totally reflected by the sides of the back. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light incident from the edge of the projection plate member 620 from decreasing.

That is, when light passing through a medium with a high refractive index travels to a medium with a low refractive index, the light is totally reflected without being incident on the medium with a low refractive index if the angle of incidence is increased. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like shape, and the light is incident from the end surface (edge) thereof, so the incident angle of the light is sufficiently large. Therefore, the light from the projection plate member 620 does not enter the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low refractive index, and the light can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 . As a result, reduction in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

Similarly, the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and the air is the same. Since the refractive index of air is a value (refractive index 1) that is sufficiently smaller than the amount of transparent material, light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 The light does not enter the air (atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 . As a result, reduction in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620 . In this case, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be made incident on the projection plate member 620 side. .

That is, at positions where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, the positions where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other are formed of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel like the light with the irradiation angle α. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the above irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 to be emitted. can.

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 not only enters from the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 can enter from the side end surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A. By increasing the amount of , it is possible to make (display) patterns and patterns clearly appear. Moreover, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

In addition, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 640. You can prevent it from getting worse.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is different from the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. direction), the incident angle of the light when the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is irradiated becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on its inner side surface, but at least part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected, The above-described state (state in which light is reflected on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle β and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed such that the intersection angle θ4 is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). ), the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) can be reflected toward the end portion 644 and then propagated along the inclined surface portion 643 so that the light with the irradiation angle β reaches the projection plate member. The area reflected to the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43( a ) and 43 ( b ), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 , the light with the irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630 .

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620 . In this case, the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 adjoin (face) each other.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is in a state of being adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere). be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the light-transmitting material of the projection plate member 620. The projected light can be incident on the projection plate member 620 .

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and travels toward the axis of the projection plate member 620, like the light with the irradiation angle α. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the above irradiation angle α, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LEDs 651 (light amount).

That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is not only incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated on the gear member 630 can be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of light that reaches the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A, so that the amount of light that is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member can be increased to make (display) the patterns and patterns clearly stand out (display). Moreover, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

In addition, since the gear member 630 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the gear member 630, and the appearance deteriorates accordingly. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is more likely to be incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A than when the gear member 630 is behind the light source A (downward in FIG. 43(a)). , the angle of incidence when irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced. As a result, it becomes difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 at its side surface, but at least part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the state described above is achieved. (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed such that the intersection angle θ2 is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). ), the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) can be reflected toward the end portion 634 and then propagated along the inclined surface portion 633, so that the light emitted at the irradiation angle γ can be The area reflected to the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge of the gear member 630 and made incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the mounting structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46. FIG.

44(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44(b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). 45(a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 45(b) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. is a cross-sectional view of. 44 and 45 show the state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, the state in which the board member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front, and a substrate on the back of the substrate member 652. It comprises a plurality of (two each in this embodiment) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 that are arranged.

The substrate member 652 is made of an elastically deformable material and formed into a horizontally long belt shape when viewed from the front. As described above, the LEDs 651 are light emitting means for emitting light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 , and are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front of the substrate member 652 . (Fig. 44(b) left-right direction) are arranged at regular intervals.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and the two first blocks 653 are arranged on the central side of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction. Second blocks 654 are arranged on both longitudinal sides of the substrate member 652 with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed of a resin material in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and have higher rigidity (a characteristic of being less elastically deformable) than the substrate member 652 . Therefore, in the attached state to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG.

46(a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 along line XLVIb-XLVIb of FIG. 46(a). 46(c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46(d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46(c).

The first block 653 has a bottom wall portion 653a which is oblong in the front view, and side wall portions 653b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side (FIG. 46(a) paper surface). front side) is formed in a box shape with an open side.

Of the four side wall portions 653b, the facing side wall portion 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a) has a fastening hole h recessed in the end face on the front side thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that Side wall portions 653b other than the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed are connected by a connecting wall 653c, and a projection 653c1 protrudes from the front end face of the connecting wall 653c.

The second block 654 has a rectangular bottom wall portion 654a when viewed from the front and side wall portions 654b erected from four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. side) is formed into an open box shape. The bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a rectangular opening 654a1 in a front view, through which an electrical connection line can be inserted.

Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h in the front end face thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. Side wall portions 653b erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c is provided with a fastening hole h in the end face on the front side. can be concluded.

In the first block 653 and the second block 654, through-holes 653b1 and 654b1 are formed at two locations in each of side wall portions 653b and 654b erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (a) and FIG. 46(b)). The holding pins 612g of the front base 612 are inserted through the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, it is possible to position the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and to hold the blocks 653 and 654 at the positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(a)) (that is, a virtual plane including the axial centers of the two fastening holes h). Moreover, it is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to a second imaginary plane passing through the center in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 46(a)) and perpendicular to the first imaginary plane.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two first blocks 653 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the first blocks 653 can be shared, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the product cost. can be done. In addition, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 has neither vertical nor longitudinal directionality with respect to the substrate member 620, which improves workability during assembly work. can be achieved.

Similarly, the second block 654 is positioned with respect to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46(c)) (that is, a virtual plane including the axial centers of the two fastening holes h). It is formed into a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two second blocks 654 are arranged for one substrate member 620, since the second blocks 654 can be shared, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. can be done. Further, when the second block 654 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the second block 654 does not have vertical directionality with respect to the substrate member 620, so that workability during assembly work can be improved. can be done.

Returning to FIGS. 44 and 45, description will be made. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the rear side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and with a predetermined gap between adjacent blocks. be.

Specifically, the front surfaces of the first block 653 and the second block 654 are superimposed on the rear surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back side of the substrate member 652 . In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652 toward the front side.

Only the LED 651 is arranged (mounted) on the front side of the board member 652 , and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back side of the board member 652 . In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in the shape of a box with an open front, and are arranged with the open side overlaid on the back of the substrate member 652 . That is, both blocks 653 and 654 are provided with recesses in the surfaces on which they are superimposed (arranged) on the substrate member 652, so that the recesses (internal spaces) accommodate electronic components and connectors mounted on the substrate member 652. can be accommodated. Therefore, the electronic parts and connectors can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, thereby suppressing damage to the electronic parts and connectors due to contact with surrounding displaceable members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can.

Also, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the rear surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, thereby suppressing damage (disconnection) of the circuit due to contact with surrounding displaceable members (for example, the projection plate member 620). can. In addition, since the portion of the substrate member 652 where the blocks 653 and 654 are not disposed is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that protrudes toward the rear side (see FIG. 34), the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be spaced apart from the plate member 620 . As a result, it is possible to suppress damage (disconnection) of the circuit even in the portion where the blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged.

A method for arranging (assembling) the irradiation unit 650 thus configured to the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, the holding pins 612g erected from the rear surface of the front base 612 are inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. .

As a result, both the blocks 653 and 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) can be held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, the front surface of the rear base 611 is overlaid on the rear surface of the front base 612 , so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611 and 612 . That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (attached) to the base member 610 .

In this embodiment, when the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, as described above. That is, not only the circumferential interval of the LEDs 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential interval of the LEDs 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same as the others. be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 allows light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 . Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 . In addition to the large number of LEDs 651, the arrangement (mounting) of the LEDs 651 is such that each LED 651 is arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do so, and the time and effort of the arrangement work increases.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on a substrate member 652 that is elastically deformable. are arranged (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), the work of arranging a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the installation work of the LEDs 651 .

Further, by inserting the holding pins 612g of the rear base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. The direction of the illuminated surface can be defined (see Figure 34). In other words, it is not necessary to assemble the plurality of LEDs 651 to the rear base 612 while individually adjusting their irradiation surfaces. Since the posture (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), it is possible to reduce the labor of the arrangement (attachment) work of the LED 651 from this point as well.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and since both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the rear base 612, vibrations and the like are prevented. By suppressing the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force, or by correcting the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself, it is possible to easily regulate the posture of the substrate member 652 to a desired posture. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in the area where the first block 653 or the second block 654 of the substrate member 652 is arranged (that is, inside the area surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in front view). is set. Therefore, warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to input of external force such as vibration can be easily suppressed, or warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself can be easily corrected. Easy to define. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

Each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface of the substrate member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at regular intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, one of the two fastening holes h formed in the second block 654 is formed in the connecting wall 654c. can be shortened. Also, the second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 in such a posture that the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed faces the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are positioned on both longitudinal end sides of the substrate member 652 .

Accordingly, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620 is ensured while ) can be shortened to provide spacing between adjacent illumination units 650 . In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be arranged using such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily made close.

On the other hand, the first block 653 has two fastening holes h formed in the connecting wall 654c, so that the distance between the fastening holes h and the LEDs 651 can be shortened. In other words, the position of fastening and fixing the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought closer to the LED 651 . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LEDs 651 to be affected by the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration. Therefore, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp and flexure of the substrate member 652, so that the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be further maintained. It can be done easily.

In this case, in the first block 653, the distance between the fastening holes h formed at the two locations is large, so there is a possibility that the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes h at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, connecting walls 653c are provided between the side walls 653b in which the fastening holes h are formed, and projections 653c1 projecting from the connecting walls 653c are inserted through the substrate member 652. pass through the hole. Therefore, by engaging the projection 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, or to easily correct the warping and bending of the substrate member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as a desired posture. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts by eliminating the need to provide the screw S1 separately. It can be easier to maintain.

Both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 (outermost in the longitudinal direction, left and right ends in FIG. 45(b)) are free ends (that is, not constrained by the second block 654). The attitude of the LEDs 651 positioned at both ends may become unstable. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the center of the arc is located on the front side. ) (see FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can act as a force in the direction of pressing the rear surfaces of both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 against the front surface of the second block 654 . As a result, the posture of the LEDs 651 located at both longitudinal ends of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG.

47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. FIG. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a rear base 830 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front base 820 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 830, and a rear base 820 on the rear side of the rear base 830. A drive motor 880 arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820 by the driving force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is arranged in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

The rear base 830 protrudes into an opening 831 formed to have a size through which the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 can be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes shaft portions 832 and 833 formed thereon, and a back-side restricting portion 834 that protrudes toward the front side and extends in a curved shape.

A shaft portion of a drive motor 880 attached to the rear side of the rear base 830 is inserted through the opening 831 . Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the rear base 830 .

Also, the opening 831 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 . Accordingly, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830 . As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of work processes for parts replacement when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts for supporting and rotatably holding transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 to be described later, and project from the rear base 830 toward the front side in a cylindrical shape.

The back-side restricting portion 834 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (inward direction of the paper surface of FIG. 47), and protrudes from the front side of the back base 830. It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a laterally long rectangular shape in a front view with an external shape slightly larger than that of the rear base 830 . The front base 820 includes a shaft support portion 821 recessed from the front side to the back side (from the front side to the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 erected at the edge of the back side, and a side wall 822 protruding to the back side. , a front-side restricting portion 824 that protrudes toward the back side and extends in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 that protrudes toward the back side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 to be described later is inserted, and is recessed on the lower right side of the front base 820 in front view.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap between the rear base 830 and the front base 820 for arranging a transmission mechanism 860 and a connecting member 870 to be described later. It is erected on the upper and left and right edges (other than the lower end) of the front base 820 with a size larger than the size. Accordingly, when the front base 820 and the rear base 830 are fastened together, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be displaceably arranged therebetween.

The protrusion 823 is a protrusion that engages with one end side (the upper side in FIG. 48 ) of a biasing spring SP, which will be described later.

The front-side restricting portion 824 is a projection that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 47). It extends in a curved shape.

The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall arranged laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP (to be described later) with a predetermined gap therebetween, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the front base 820 toward the rear side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, which mesh with each other in series. is transmitted to

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a projecting portion 863c that projects in an arc shape about the shaft, and the rotation position of the shaft portion 863c. and a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting .

The toothed portion 863 a is a meshing surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863 , so that the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863 .

The shaft portion 863 b is a shaft that is connected to the connecting member 870 , protrudes in a columnar shape toward the rear side, and is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863 .

The protruding portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the frontward displacement of the connecting member 870, and is formed to protrude from the outer edge portion on the back side of the transmission gear 863. It is formed curved in a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of a position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 is formed thereon. It is formed so as to protrude radially outward on the non-contact side surface.

The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850. The connecting member 870 is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front. A gear-side connecting hole 871 formed through, a displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and a contact formed projecting upward from the outside of the curved portion. a portion 873;

The gear-side connecting hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870 .

The displacement-side connecting hole 872 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853 . Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850 .

The abutting portion 873 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the rear-side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 facing each other. be done.

In addition, the contact portion 873 has a front-to-rear width dimension of the front end that is slightly smaller than the distance between the rear-side regulation portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front-side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820 . It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the abutting portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back-side restricting portion 834 and the front-side restricting portion 824, thereby increasing the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced. can prevent it from becoming On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by contacting the front base 820 or the rear base 830 .

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (the right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . Further, the cover member 840 is formed with a shaft supporting portion 841 that is recessed in a circular shape from the back side to the front side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (supports) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting the front end of the pin member 890 , and is positioned opposite the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 . formed in As a result, the pin member 890 is arranged between the opposing shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 , so that it can be prevented from falling out of the vertical displacement unit 800 .

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (the right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the other end side (the left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. The displacement member 850 is formed with a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a projection 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 for transmitting the driving force of the connecting member 870 .

The shaft hole 851 is a through hole through which the pin member 890 is inserted, as described above. is also formed large. Therefore, the displacement member 850 is arranged between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 in a state in which the pin member 890 is inserted through the shaft hole 851 . , the displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 in a rotatable state about the axis of the shaft hole 851 .

The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (lower end in FIG. 50) of the biasing spring SP is engaged, and protrudes from the back side of the displacement member 850 . Further, when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position protruding from below the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 to the rear side, and the protrusion distance is set to the front side of the rear base. is formed up to a position substantially coinciding with the side surface of the . Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the biasing spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward in the gravitational direction with respect to the front base 820 .

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft that is inserted into the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870, and when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, it is positioned below the front base 820 (see FIG. 50). lower side). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870 .

The pin member 890 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 as described above, and is formed of a metal rod-shaped body that is harder than the displacement member 850 . As a result, damage to the rotating shaft can be suppressed when force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

In addition, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates is divided into the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft supports 821 and 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistance can be divided into two parts, it is possible to suppress damage to the part due to an increase in resistance at one point.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. FIG. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. is. 54 to 56 show a state in which the rear base 830 is removed for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (left side in FIG. 52) is positioned upward (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is positioned upward. A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

At the first position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b connects the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. are arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, at the first position, the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 to form a state (that is, a dead point) in which no force component is generated in the direction to rotate the transmission gear 863 . As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

51 and 54, power is supplied to the drive motor 880, the drive motor 880 is driven to rotate, and the transmission gears 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) are rotated. The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement-side connecting hole 872 formed in the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacing member 850, thereby rotating the displacing member 850.

In this case, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the displacement of the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the connecting member 870 A straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 intersects. Therefore, the state where the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 and does not generate a force component in the direction to rotate the transmission gear 863 (that is, the dead point) can be released. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 begins to rotate in the direction of rotation displacing the displacement member 850 (right rotation in FIG. 54), the gravity of the displacement member 850 pulls the gear-side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780. , in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 rotates. As a result, the energy consumed by the drive motor 880 during displacement from the first position can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the axis (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the transmission gear 863 At a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are substantially orthogonal, the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the urging spring SP force is balanced (intermediate position).

Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, by turning off the power supply to the drive motor 880, the displacement member 850 is moved around the intermediate position (balanced position). The displacement member 850 can be caused to reciprocate by the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravitational direction can be an orthographic projection of uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied, so that the displacement member can perform interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if electric power is supplied to the driving motor 880 and driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the displacement (the orthogonal projection of uniform circular motion) described above is different. In this manner, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, thereby increasing variations in displacement. That is, only by switching on or off the power supply to the driving motor 880 to switch whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, it is possible to increase the variation of displacement, thereby improving the structure and control. Since there is no need for complication, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force to the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is cancelled, and the gravitational force of the displacement member 850 is applied. and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP. The displacement can also be a combination of rotational motion about the shaft hole 851 as the center of rotation. As a result, the displacement member 850 can be made to perform interesting displacements.

In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (vertically displaced) as the displacement member 850 is displaced to rotate the transmission gear 863 . Since the posture of 863 is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the pushing/pulling direction. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocatingly displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be varied, and the displacement member can be caused to perform interesting displacements.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the axial center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 A straight line connecting the axial centers and a straight line connecting the axial centers of the gear-side connecting hole 871 and the displacement-side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are located at substantially orthogonal positions. The magnitude of the force component in the direction to rotate the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the balanced position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced from the balanced position in either direction of pushing or pulling. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocatingly displaced, the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balanced position. can be easily continued.

When power is supplied to the drive motor 880 from the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55 to further rotate the transmission gears 861, 862, and 863 (the transmission mechanism 860), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 moves further downward. is displaced to Therefore, the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connecting hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connecting member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacing member 850 to rotate the displacing member 850 .

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, when the other end of the displacement member 850 (the left side in FIG. 53) is placed in the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is placed downward. , a connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed below. As a result, since the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged downward, the displacement member 850 can be pushed downward.

At the second position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 A straight line connecting the axes of the holes 872 is arranged with the same straight line length.

Therefore, at the second position, the displacement member 850 pushes and pulls the connecting member 870 to form a state (that is, a dead point) in which no force component is generated to rotate the transmission gear 863 . As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

Next, transmission gear 863 and connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the first position, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 at the intermediate position. (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. 57(a) to 57(c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), at the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the rear base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the rear base 830 or the transmission gear 863 .

Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, at the first position, the displacement member 850 is arranged upward to form a retracted state in which the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player, so that the displacement member 850 is preferably stopped. However, by increasing the resistance to drive the displacement member 850, the stopped state can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57(b) and 57(c), electric power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is rotated to the second position). 6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 do not face each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connection member 870 arranged between the transmission gear 863 and the rear base 830 can be increased. can be made smaller.

Therefore, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace the displacing member 850 in front of the third pattern display device 81 in a short period of time. , the displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57(c), the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 at the second position.

Here, when the displacing member that displaces up and down is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacing member is added to the inertial force at the time of stopping, so there is a problem that the displacing member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the vertical displacement unit 800 can bring the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 into contact with the transmission gear 863. is stopped by connecting member 870 contacting transmission gear 863, and by stopping rotation of transmission gear 863 (driving of drive motor 880). can be distributed in one As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), transmission gear 863 and connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described. 58(a) to 58(c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first driving range θ5. 58(a) to 58(c) illustrate transition states from the first position. 58(a) to 58(c), a portion of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is illustrated by broken lines.

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced within the first drive range θ5, the first position is changed to the second position. As the transmission gear 863 shifts to the position, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced along with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be displaced smoothly.

Further, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while displacing the displacement member 850 to the first position of the retracted position. When the displacement member 850 is displaced to the position and stopped, the displacement member 850 can be brought to a stopped state quickly.

That is, when displacing and stopping the displacement member 850, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state due to the inertial force that stops the movement, but since the resistance of the displacement member 850 when stopping can be increased, the stopped state can be quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced within the second drive range θ6, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. can be formed, the resistance to displace the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second driving range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the extension operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second driving range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced about the intermediate position (balanced position), The reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be smoothly performed by avoiding the generation of resistance by the portion 863c.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820 and the rear base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c). 59(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along the LIXa-LIXa line in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along the LIXb-LIXb line in FIG. FIG. 59(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 along line LIXc-LIXc in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is located between the front-side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820 and the rear-side regulation portion 834 of the rear base 830. placed in

That is, the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 . As a result, the longitudinal displacement of the connecting member 870 is restricted.

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement-side connecting hole 872, the displacement member 850 tilts in the front-rear direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850 by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from tilting in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59(c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in

Thereby, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 and the front base 820 and the rear base 830 at the second position can be increased. As a result, resistance when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, in the vertical displacement unit 800, the contact portion 873 is on a substantially straight line connecting the axial center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the axial center of the gear-side connection hole of the connection member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and the transmission gear 863 It is arranged on the side opposite to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 across the axis of the gear-side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles with respect to the front base 820 and the rear base 830 , the abutting portion 873 of the connecting member 870 abuts against the front base 820 and the rear base 830 . Inclination of the portion 863b and the gear-side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 .

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. FIG. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is It is set to have the same outer diameter as the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 .

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 60(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60(b) is a projection along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60(a). FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640;

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are arranged on the rear and front sides of the projection plate member 2620, respectively. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter that is the same as the outer diameters of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 . In addition, the projection plate member 2620 has a notch portion 621 in a part of the outer edge and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 2620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section that is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. and a guide groove 2641. The groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side of the projection plate member 2620 (the upper side in FIG. 60(b)), and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620 . Further, the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and is formed to have a width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by guiding the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 to the guide grooves 2641 .

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. FIG. In addition, in FIG.61(b), FIG.62(b), and FIG.63(b), illustration of a cross-sectional line is abbreviate|omitted in order to make an understanding easy.

61(b), 62(b) and 63(b), the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640, as in the first embodiment. The angle of refraction at that time is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is illustrated in a manner in which they are orthogonal. Furthermore, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light of the irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is projected onto the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620 . Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axis center). Therefore, the light from the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. This allows the edge of the projection plate member 2620 to be placed near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LEDs 651 .

As shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 irradiates the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side in FIG. 62(a)) from the guide groove 641. Light at angle β2 is incident on the front edge of groove forming member 2640 .

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 2620 . In this case, as in the first embodiment, at positions where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent to each other (facing), the light irradiated to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is projected onto the projection plate member 2620 . can be made incident on

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 irradiates the groove forming member 2640 on the back side of the guide groove 641 (lower side in FIG. 62(a)). The light with the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the rear edge of the groove forming member 2640 .

The light irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and reflected. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surfaces of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 at positions where they are adjacent (facing).

That is, by recessing the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is directed to the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and made incident on the projection plate member 2620 .

Therefore, by recessing and forming the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the collar C and the role of collecting the light onto the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. .

Moreover, compared to the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the additional irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the emitted light from the LEDs 651 . .

Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the rear side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 2640. You can prevent it from getting worse.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light that illuminates the gear member 630 is the same as in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. In the first embodiment, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer edge of the projection plate member 620. However, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are , a floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620 .

First, referring to FIGS. 64 and 65, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, gear member 3630 and groove forming member 640 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 64(a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64(b) is a projection along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 640;

65(a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 64(a), and FIG. 65(b) is a side view of FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 along the LXVb-LXVb line, and FIG. 65(c) is the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 along the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65(a). and a cross-sectional view of a groove forming member 640. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed in a circular plate-like body when viewed from the front. arranged on each side. The projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and has protrusions 3623 that protrude to the front side and the back side at the outer edge thereof.

The projecting portion 3623 is formed to have a substantially triangular cross section projecting toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64(b)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) toward the outer edge. In addition, the projection 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the virtual line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the recessed groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. be done. On the other hand, the projection 3623 protruding to the back side is set on a virtual line G connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of a recessed groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630, which will be described later. be.

The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 . In addition, the gear member 3630 includes a recessed groove 3635 which is recessed at a predetermined interval in the side surface on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 64(b)) and a screw-fixing member which is formed through the recessed groove 3635 at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. and a stop hole 636 for.

The recessed grooves 3635 are grooves that are recessed in the radial direction and are formed on both circumferential sides of each stop hole 636 . Accordingly, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64(b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a plate-like body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620 . In addition, the groove forming member 3640 is formed through the groove 3645 which is recessed at a predetermined interval in the side surface on the back side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. and an opening 646 for screwing.

The recessed groove 3645 is a groove that extends in the radial direction and is formed at a position facing the recessed groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630 . Thereby, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620 .

In this case, as shown in FIG. 65, the surface where the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are grounded is an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 is inserted. The planes overlap in the radial direction. As a result, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the holding force. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG.

66(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In addition, in FIG.66(b), illustration of a cross-sectional line is abbreviate|omitted in order to make an understanding easy.

In FIG. 66(b), as in the first embodiment, the angle of refraction when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 does not affect the present invention. , the light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is illustrated in an orthogonal fashion. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is located at the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. Incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and rear side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620 . As a result, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 toward the central side (axial side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end face of the projection plate member 3620 is can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be made to reach the reflecting portion 622 more easily. and patterns can be made to stand out clearly.

On the other hand, the light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 . In this case, since the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side unlike the mode.

Therefore, light emitted from a light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected toward the projection plate member 3620, and is made incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630. can be suppressed from being incident. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the display provided on the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from being highlighted (displayed) by light other than the LEDs 651 .

In addition, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A portion where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646 , when light enters from the radially outer side of the opening 646 , the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 does not enter the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from entering the projection plate member 3620 side.

Furthermore, in this case, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion of the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed in the entire area overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction. Displacement of the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 with respect to the plate member 3620 can be suppressed.

Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light from the LED 651 is passed through the gap toward the axial center of the projection plate member 3620, There is a risk that light may leak from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

On the other hand, since the protrusion 3623 is formed on the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 is projected onto the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edges of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Furthermore, the projection 3623 can increase the dimension in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66(a)) of the edge side surface of the projection plate member 3620, so that the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (amount of light) emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the intensity (amount of light) of the light emitted from the LEDs 651 . .

Next, an irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 67(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67(b) is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. FIG. 68(a) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68(b) is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. FIG. In addition, FIG.67(b) respond|corresponds to FIG.44(b). 68 schematically shows a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 with screws S2. In this case, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651 . That is, the amount of protrusion of the screw S2 from the front surface of the board member 620 is made larger than the amount of protrusion of the LED 651 .

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is the height of the projection plate member 620 at the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. The dimensions are set so that the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 cannot come into contact with the LEDs 651 disposed between the two screws S2 when the outer peripheral surface is brought into contact (circumscribed).

This allows the LED 651 to be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, if it comes close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to rattling in the radial direction based on dimensional tolerance or assembly tolerance, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is twisted. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is made of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is made of a metal material. can increase the effectiveness of Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn out, and the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Also, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided.

Since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2 in this way, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since complicated shapes can be omitted, the shapes of the rear base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

In addition, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, it is possible to reduce the allowable amount of rattling in the radial direction due to the dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance of the parts, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LEDs 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 .

Next, a projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. FIG. In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a disc shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated around the center of the circle. , and is slidably displaced in one direction.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. Note that FIG. 72 shows a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 includes a base member 5610 formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and having an opening at the center, and a base member 5610 slidably disposed in the opening of the base member 5610. a projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 for emitting light from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidingly displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 for driving the projection plate member. A gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmission to 5620 is mainly provided.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has a rear base 5611 having a horizontally long rectangular opening at the center, and is arranged in front of the rear base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the rear base 5611 . A projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 and a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) are stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. a central opening 5612h, an inner standing portion 612a erected on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i protruding from both upper ends of the central opening 5612h, It mainly includes two shaft portions 5612k projecting rearward from between the pair of holding portions 5612i, and a sliding projection 5612m projecting rearward from below the central opening 5612h. be.

The central opening 5612h has a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center of the front base 5612 when viewed from the front. The player can visually recognize patterns and patterns of the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portions 5612i are protrusions for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later, and are formed so as to protrude from the upper ends of the central opening 5612h toward the rear side of the front base 5612 (the front side of the paper in FIG. 71). Further, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a recessed groove 5612i1 that is recessed toward the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 71) on the projecting surface thereof.

The concave groove 5612i1 is recessed from the central portion of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 71) toward the end portion so as to have an arcuate cross-sectional shape. formed larger than The pair of recessed grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is equal to the axis of the rod member 5625. Set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after disposing the rod member 5625 on the inner peripheral surface of the recessed groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is formed at a position facing the recessed groove 5612i1 from the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). By arranging the holding part covers 5628 provided at both ends, the rod members 5625 can be arranged on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion that serves as a rotation shaft of a rotating member 5670, which will be described later.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of a rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to protrude from the lower side of the central opening 5612h toward the rear side. Also, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at symmetrical positions about a vertical line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 as an axis.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmissive material so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of the pattern. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or pattern in front of the third pattern display device 81 .

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at the lower end, and a reflecting portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620 . The rack 5627 is arranged below the central opening of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612h of the front base 5612) and is arranged at a position that is not visible from the front side of the assembled projection unit 5600. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the lateral dimension of the projection plate member 5620 (horizontal direction in FIG. 72). As a result, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the lateral dimension of the projection plate member 5620 .

The rack 5627 is formed with a rack gear 5627a that meshes with the gear 5668 on the lower surface thereof, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the central portion.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). and is formed over the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627 .

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for suppressing the inclination of the rack 5627 when the rack 5627 is displaced in the horizontal direction by driving the drive motor 661. The sliding groove 5627b is elongated in the horizontal direction. A pair of sliding projections 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the rear base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated, and the rack 5627 is slidably displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the rear side of the projection plate member 5620 is a cylindrical rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72), and a horizontally long rectangle in a front view facing the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 interposed therebetween. A shaped front cover 5626 is provided.

The bar member 5625 is longer in the left-right direction than the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction and shorter than the outer diameter of the rear base 5611 . It is arranged on the projection plate member 5620 sandwiched therebetween.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the bar member 5625, and the length in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. It is disposed on the projection plate member 5620 with the bar member 5625 sandwiched between it and the member 5620 .

The front cover 5626 has a groove 5626a recessed in the left-right direction on the side facing the projection plate member 5620. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged, and is recessed to have a substantially U-shaped cross section. be done.

Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626a. This allows the projection plate member 5620 to be slidably displaced relative to the rod member 5625 in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 .

Also, the bar member 5625 is arranged on the back side rather than the front side surface of the front cover 5626 . That is, since the bar member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626 , the front cover 5626 can be arranged on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620 .

Here, if the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the rear side of the projection plate member 5620. FIG. However, since the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits the light incident thereon from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or design, the projection plate member 5620 is formed with grooves. If the thickness dimension is partially reduced, it becomes difficult for the light incident on the interior of the projection plate member 5620 to travel due to the reduced thickness dimension, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be placed on the front cover 5626 in which the bar member 5625 is arranged without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the incident light from traveling inside the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult, and to prevent the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

In addition, as described above, since the bar member 5625 is attached to the front base 5612 at both ends so as not to fall off, the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the bar member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the drive motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid laterally. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the horizontal direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the first block are aligned with the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. They are arranged in opposite positions. Accordingly, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is made incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the patterns and patterns of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be highlighted.

The side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged is formed with a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in a rear view toward the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 toward the rear side, and the raised dimension is set larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670, which will be described later. Thereby, a rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512 .

A projection 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is arranged in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the protrusion 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and sandwiching it between the front base 5612 and the rear base 5611 .

A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650 .

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent into an L-shape when viewed from the front. A second block 654 of 650 is attached. A through hole 5671 is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is arranged on the front base 5612, it can rotate with respect to the front base 5612 about the shaft portion 5612k.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670 , the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612 . That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670 , the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653 .

The rotating member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in a direction to displace one tip portion downward relative to the shaft portion 5612k. 5612. Further, a displacement regulating projection 5612j projecting to the rear side is formed on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is arranged.

The displacement restricting protrusion 5612j is a member that restricts the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip of the protrusion is located behind the rotating member 5670 arranged on the front base 5612 (toward the rear base 5611). It is positioned on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 . As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is restricted by the displacement restricting projection 5612j, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 toward the projection plate member 5620 is directed to the displacement restricting projection. It is possible to suppress being blocked by 5612j.

Next, the operation of projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. 73(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

75(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. 76(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 and 76 show a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed. In addition, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is just a left-to-right reversal of the displacement operation from the first state to the second state, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged substantially in the center of the central opening 5612h in the left-right direction, the rotational The member 5670 is urged by an urging spring (not shown) so that one end thereof is displaced downward. Thereby, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotary member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed to It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light from the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be made incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 (the left and right sides in FIG. 74(a)), and the projection plate member 5620 The amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, and the driving force is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) to the rack 5627. When the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is slid rightward in front view (rightward in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 is also slid rightward (see FIGS. 73(b) and 74(b)). ). As a result, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side of the central opening 5612h when viewed from the front.

In this case, the front cover 5626 provided on the front side of the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 abuts on the other side of the L-shaped rotation member 5670 arranged in the sliding direction. As a result, a rotational moment can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k, which serves as the rotation axis, in a direction that pushes the one end side upward. Accordingly, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 arranged on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74) is displaced. (b) left-right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are substantially on the same straight line.

As a result, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is slid, and the amount of light incident from the upper end face of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased. can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the patterns and designs of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

In addition, as the projection plate member 5620 is slid and displaced, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed. can be changed. In other words, it is possible to change the mode of patterns and designs displayed on the projection plate member 5620 . As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, an LED arranged at a different position is turned on according to the displacement to keep the light amount of the projection plate member constant. As a result, it is necessary to control the lighting and extinguishing of the LEDs. As the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LEDs becomes more complicated, and there is a problem that the reliability of the product is lowered. Furthermore, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LEDs are arranged at different positions.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and arranged at another position. Since there is no need to control the LED 651 to turn on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to irradiate a displaced irradiated object (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiating objects (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated object, the irradiation range of each irradiating object There is a problem that a portion with a weak amount of light is created between them, and when the object to be illuminated is displaced, brightness and darkness are created, which reduces the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-described problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the number of irradiators to be arranged increases, so the problem is that the product cost increases. there was a point

However, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 can be displaced as the projection plate member 5620 is displaced. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of brightness and darkness of light accompanying the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby suppressing loss of interest of the player. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the projection plate member 5620 is slid and displaced to change the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 . The drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654 can be combined, and it becomes unnecessary to newly provide a driving means for displacing the second block 654 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the product.

Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 and the respective blocks 653 and 654 made of an elastically deformable material, there is no need to form the displaceable second block 654 as a separate member. Therefore, the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit is arranged on the front base 5612 and then connected with the wiring, so that the irradiation unit 650 can be arranged on the front base 5612, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, by reversing the driving of the drive motor 661, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h. Accordingly, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid to form the first state.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 on the side (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is pushed up by the projection plate by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the front base 5612 and the front base 5612 . As the member 5620 is slid to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shape in the front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed downward and rotated around the shaft portion 5612k. Further, as described above, the rotational range of the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is restricted by being brought into contact with the displacement restricting protrusion 5612j.

As described above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. Description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side of the central opening 5612h in front view (see FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b)).

Next, a projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. possible.

First, the overall configuration of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 with the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member arranged so as to be partially visible through an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620 , an irradiation unit 650 that allows light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620 , a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620 , and a driving force of the drive motor 661 that is transmitted to the projection plate member 6620 . A gear train (gears 662 to 664) for

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped rear base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 arranged in front of the rear base 611. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650 and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

The front base 6612 has an annular shielding member 6612r formed on the inner edge of the annular front base 612 of the first embodiment. A portion 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the rear side visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 which is annular in front view, The shielding member 6612r has a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference, and is formed on the right side when viewed from the front.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 6612 in a region between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c on the outer edge of the opening 6612p. are accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of the bases 611 and 612 by overlapping the front surfaces of the bases 611 and 612 .

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and its inner diameter is formed larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612 . Also, the projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612 . Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the rear side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). ), so that it is difficult for the player to see it, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and allows the display of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side to pass through and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. In addition, when the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or design. , through the opening 6612p of the player. That is, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or design in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 .

Further, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflecting portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light inside. Reflecting portion 6622 is a portion whose interior has been roughened by laser processing or the like, and a pattern, pattern, or the like is formed by dividing the projection plate member 6620 in the circumferential direction over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 when viewed from the front. be. In the present embodiment, the shape of the reflective portion 6622, such as patterns and patterns, is divided into six in the circumferential direction, and reflection areas 6622a to 6622f, such as six patterns and patterns, are formed (see FIG. 80). .

Further, the projection plate member 6620 has the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the rear side and the front side, respectively, on the outer peripheral edge. Accordingly, as in the first embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664).

Next, referring to FIG. 80, the operation of projection unit 6600 will be described. 80(a) to 80(c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 80(a) to 80(c) illustrate transition states of the projection plate member 6620. FIG. Also, FIG. 80 illustrates a state in which the rear base 611 is removed. Also, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflecting portion 6622 (reflecting areas 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when the projection plate member 6620 is arranged at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is located inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front (viewed from the back to the front of the page). A reflective area 6622a is provided. Therefore, when the light from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge of the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to display the patterns and patterns of the reflection area 6622a inside the opening 6612p. In other words, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern that appears inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflective areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflective area 6622a. The display in areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be seen. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player will not be able to visually recognize the display other than the display surface, and the player's interest will be spoiled by being able to visually recognize other areas. can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(b) and 80(c), when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, patterns and patterns of the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in front view are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and patterns can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or pattern is printed on the front surface of the object to be irradiated (projection plate member 6620), and the object to be irradiated is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible area (opening portion) of the object to be irradiated can be changed. 6612p), the pattern and pattern switching of the irradiated object can be seen, and the player can understand which display will be displayed next before finishing the switching of the pattern and pattern. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed until the end.

In addition, even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates light to the object is turned off and the display surface of the object is darkened, the object to be irradiated may be affected by the light from other devices or fluorescent lights in the store. By being irradiated, the player can visually recognize the patterns and patterns of the object to be irradiated.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmissive material, and by turning off the light from the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the projection plate member 6620 becomes transparent, making it difficult to see the patterns and designs. be able to. Therefore, by turning off the illumination of the LED 651 when rotating the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching of the patterns and patterns of the projection plate member 6620. 6620 displacements can be enjoyed to the end.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated about its center as the rotation axis. The space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of the 6612.

That is, when the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, the installation space in the horizontal or vertical direction is limited. , the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and designs.

Next, the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 121. FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140 and the specific winning opening 65a are formed in a winning opening unit 930 configured as one unit. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, as in the first embodiment, the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 10 will be described as the front side (or front), and the back side of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1 will be described as the rear side (or rear).

First, with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. FIG. Note that in FIG. 82, illustration of units (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81), etc.) other than the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 disposed on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 82, the base plate 60 has a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 below the central opening in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 82) to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 81) is attached. is formed by router processing.

The through-hole 60a is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 described later when viewed from the front, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 provided in the front unit 940 are inserted inside the through-hole 60a.

On the base plate 60, a prize winning unit 930 is arranged from the game area (front) side, and a ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite side (rear side) to the game area, which are fastened and fixed by tapping screws or the like. The detailed configurations of the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86, the overall configuration of the prize winning port unit 930 will be described. 83(a) is a front view of the prize winning unit 930, and FIG. 83(b) is a rear view of the prize winning unit 930. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective front view of the prize winning unit 930, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective rear view of the prize winning unit 930. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 930, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 930. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 86, the prize winning unit 930 includes a front unit 940, a specific winning unit 950 disposed on the back side of the front unit 940 (FIG. Mainly a drive unit 960 arranged on the back side of the specific winning opening unit 950 (Fig. formed in preparation for

As described above, the front unit 940 is formed to have an outer shape larger than the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. Therefore, by arranging the winning opening unit 930 (front unit 940) on the base plate 60, the opening of the through hole 60a can be closed. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can pass through paths other than the game ball passing path (first winning port 64, second winning port 140 and specific winning port 65a) formed in the front unit 940 described later. It is possible to prevent the space from passing through the through hole 60a.

Part of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted inside the specific winning opening 65a formed in the front unit 940, and the game ball can be thrown to the inside of the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a. be done. A detailed description of the specific winning hole unit 950 will be given later.

The drive unit 960 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning hole unit 950, and a part thereof (insertion part 965e of the transmission member 965) is attached to the feather member 945 arranged in the front unit via the displacement member 966. concatenated. As a result, the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960 can be operated to rotationally displace the feather member 945 . A detailed description of the operation of the feather member 945 will be given later.

Next, a detailed description of the front unit 940 will be given with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. FIG. 87(a) is a front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 87(b) is a back view of the front unit 940. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective front view of the front unit 940, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective rear view of the front unit 940. FIG. In addition, in FIG.87(a) and FIG.87(b), the outer shape of the feather member 945 is illustrated with the chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the front unit 940 includes a rear base 941 fastened to the base plate 60, and a front base 943 disposed on the rear base 941 at a distance larger than the diameter of the game ball. and two (a pair of) feather members 945 rotatably disposed between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The back base 941 is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined plate thickness and having an upside-down substantially T-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear base 941 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The inside of the hole 60a can be visually recognized.

The rear base 941 includes a first out port 71 cut out on the downstream side of the game ball (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 87(b))) and an upper side of the first out port 71 (see FIG. 87 ( b) a specific prize winning port 65a positioned above) and penetrating in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape; It is mainly provided with a first prize winning port 64 formed by notching in the side edge.

Further, the rear base 941 has a plurality of through holes 941a penetrating in the plate thickness direction in the outer edge portion. The through-hole 941a includes a first through-hole 941a1 whose diameter is reduced from the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 87(a)) to the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 87(b)), and a second through hole 941a2 whose diameter is reduced as the diameter increases.

The first through-hole 941a1 is a hole through which a tapping screw is inserted to fasten and fix the back base 941 (winning unit 930) to the base plate 60. The inner diameter of the first through-hole 941a1 is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the tapping screw. be done. Also, as described above, the first through hole 941a1 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the front side to the back side, so that the head of the tapping screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the tapping screw from protruding into the game area. Furthermore, a positioning protrusion 942a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the rear surface of the rear base 941 is formed in the vicinity of the first through hole 941a1.

The positioning protrusion 942a is formed at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 60b (see FIG. 82) formed around the through hole 60a of the base plate 60, and has an outer diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the positioning hole 60b. be. As a result, the rear base 941 (the prize winning unit 930) can be positioned relative to the base plate 60 and disposed.

The second through-hole 941a2 is a hole through which a screw for fastening the rear base 941 and the front base 943 is inserted from the rear base 941 side, and the inner diameter is set larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion of the screw. That is, the front base 943 is fastened with screws from the rear side of the rear base 941 . In this case, the operation of removing the front base 943 from the rear base 941 requires that the prize winning unit 930 is removed from the base plate 60 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally removing only the front base 943 from the front side (game area side) of the game board 13 .

Further, as described above, the second through hole 941a2 is formed so as to decrease in diameter from the back side to the front side, so that the head of the screw can be accommodated in the enlarged diameter portion on the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the head of the screw from protruding to the rear side of the rear base 941 . As a result, when the specific winning hole unit 950 described later is arranged on the back side of the back base 941, the head of the screw can be prevented from coming into contact with the specific winning hole unit 950. FIG.

The rear base 941 has a lower (lower in FIG. 87(b)) end in the gravitational force direction formed along the inner edge of the inner rail 61 (see FIG. A01) of the game board 13 . The first out port 71 is formed so that the edge of the notch bottom (the edge on the upper side in the direction of gravity) is separated from the inner edge of the inner rail 61 by at least the diameter of the game ball. As a result, of the game balls flowing down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60), the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the specific winning opening 65a, and the general winning opening 63 () A game ball that has not flowed into any of them can be thrown to the back side of the game board 13 (opposite side of the game area (FIG. 87(b) front side of the paper surface)) through the first out port 71 .

The first winning hole 64 is formed by cutting out a semicircular end portion of the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) opposite to the first out hole 71 . In addition, the first winning hole 64 is formed so that the size of the inner edge thereof is larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball flowing into the first receiving portion 941g, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (Fig. 87(b) front side of the paper surface)) through the first winning port 64.

At the edge of the first winning port 64, a first receiving portion 941g protruding toward the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(a)) and formed in a cup shape, and the side opposite to the game area (FIG. 87 ( b) A first ball feeding portion 942g that protrudes in a U-shaped cross section is formed on the front side of the paper surface).

The first receiving portion 941g is formed to have a size capable of receiving one game ball inside. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area from the gravity direction upper side of the first receiving portion 941g (first winning port 64) can be caused to flow into the inside of the first receiving portion 941g.

In addition, the bottom surface of the first receiving portion 941g is inclined downward toward the back side (opposite side of the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b))). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the first receiving portion 941g can be thrown to the rear side (first ball-throwing portion 942g side) through the first winning port 64 below.

Further, the first receiving portion 941g extends from the upper ends of both ends of the base plate 60 in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87) toward the second prize winning opening side (lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87(a))). A guide portion 941g1 is provided so as to be inclined outwardly in the lateral direction of the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. The guide part 941 g 1 is formed in a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness, and the side surface opposite to the game area (back side) is connected to the front side of the back base 941 . As a result, the rigidity of the first receiving portion 941g can be increased, and it is possible to suppress damage to the first receiving portion 941g due to collision of the game ball flowing down the flow region with the first receiving portion 941g.

Further, if the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the specific winning port 65 are integrally formed on the rear base 941, the arrangement of the game nails that change the game balls flowing down the game area becomes insufficient. It becomes difficult to change the flow direction of Therefore, even though there is a risk that the interest of the player will be spoiled, by causing the game ball to collide with the guide portion 941g1, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed. .

Further, since the guide portion 941g1 is inclined to the outside in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (both sides in the left and right direction in FIG. 87(a)) toward the second winning hole 140, the game that collides with the guide portion 941g1. The sphere can be guided horizontally outward of the rear base 941 . As a result, the game ball can collide again with the game nail (not shown) arranged on the base plate 60, and the game ball can be easily changed in the flowing direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

The first ball feeding portion 942g is formed in a U shape that is open on the upper side in the direction of gravity, and the distance dimension between opposing inner edges thereof is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. The first ball-throwing portion 942g has a bottom surface that slopes downward toward the back side (the side opposite to the game area (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b))), and the protruding tip side is formed by a ball-throwing unit, which will be described later. The edge of the inlet 982d of 970 is abutted. As a result, the game ball thrown to the first ball throwing portion 942g from the inside of the first receiving portion 941g through the first winning port 64 can be rolled to the back side and thrown to the ball throwing unit 970.

The first ball feeding portion 942g has a first recessed cutout portion 942g1 cut out in a rectangular shape in a side view at the upper end portion of the projecting tip. The first recessed portion 942g1 is a recessed portion on which a second protrusion 982d1 of the ball feeding unit 970, which will be described later, is placed, and is recessed to have approximately the same size as the side view shape of the second protrusion 982d1. A detailed description of the arrangement of the first ball-throwing portion 942g and the ball-throwing unit 970 will be given later.

The second prize winning opening 140 is penetratingly formed in a substantially D shape with an upwardly curved shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner edge larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, a game ball to be thrown between opposing feather members 945, which will be described later, can be thrown to the back side (opposite side of the game area (Fig. 87(b) front side of the paper surface)) through the second winning hole 140.

The second winning port 140 has a front side wall portion 941b protruding toward the front side (the game area side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(a))) and a back side (the side opposite to the game area (FIG. 87). (b) A second ball feeding portion 942c protruding toward the front side of the paper)) is formed.

The front side wall portion 941b is formed along both side edges of the second winning opening in the short direction of the base plate 60 . The front side wall portion 941b is sized so that its projecting tip end surface abuts a ball-feeding guide portion 943d of the front base 943, which will be described later.

The second ball feeding portion 942c is formed at each of both ends of the lower edge portion of the second prize winning opening 140 so as to be bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the rear. The dimension of the second ball feeding portion 942c in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 87(b)) is set larger than the radius of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls rolling on the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later, from falling from the upper surface of the rolling portion 943a.

The pair of second ball feeding portions 942c are arranged so that the distance between them in the lateral direction of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction in FIG. 87(b)) is equal to the lateral direction of the base plate 60 of the rolling portion 943a of the front base 943, which will be described later. (Fig. 87(b) left-right direction) is set to be substantially the same length dimension, and the rolling part 943a is provided inside. In addition, the second ball feeding portion 942c is formed with a second recessed portion 942c1 cut out on the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 87(b))) of the projecting tip portion. The second recessed portion 942c1 is a portion in which a projection 981b1 of a passage unit, which will be described later, is placed, and detailed description thereof will be given later.

The back base 941 moves from the game area side of the back base 941 toward the opposite side of the game area to the other side of the gravity direction (first winning opening 64 side (upper side in FIG. 87(b)) in the vicinity of the second winning opening 140. A first shaft hole 941d formed in two places in a circular shape, two first openings 941e curved around the axis of the first shaft hole 941d and penetrating the rear base 941, and A projecting portion 941c projecting between the first guide wall 942b located outside the two first openings 941e in the facing direction and projecting on the back side, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. and

The first shaft hole 941d can support a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a blade member 945, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a. Thereby, one end of the shaft member 945a can be inserted into the first shaft hole 941d and supported.

The first opening 941e has an arcuate shape centered on the center of the first shaft hole 941d. Further, the first opening 941e allows the projection 945b of the feather member 945 to pass through, and is set larger than the maximum width dimension of the projection 945b in the radial direction of the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945. Thereby, when the feather member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the projection 945b from contacting the inner surface of the first opening 941e.

The projecting portion 941c has an isosceles triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the corners of the isosceles connecting portion are positioned on substantially the same plane as the central position between the opposing feather members 945 described later. In addition, the uneven sides of the projecting portion 941c are formed to extend parallel to the facing direction of the feather members 945, and the length dimension thereof is set slightly larger than the dimension between the facing feather members 945 in the closed state. be. Furthermore, the projecting portion 941c is formed at a position where the shortest separation distance from the feather member 945 in the closed state is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when the feather members 945 are closed, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being thrown to the second winning opening 140 (between the pair of feather members 945 facing each other). A detailed description of the closed state of the feather member 945 will be given later.

The pair of first guide walls 942b are walls that guide the displacement of the displacement member 966 when the displacement member 966 is displaced. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension in the short side direction of 966.

In addition, the pair of first guide walls 942b are formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and are extended in a direction in which bent portions approach each other. As a result, the displacement distance of the displacement member 966 can be regulated by bringing the projecting portion 966a of the displacement member 966 into contact with the bent portion of the first guide wall 942b.

The specific winning opening 65a has a long rectangular opening in the facing direction of the pair of feather members 945 (horizontal direction in FIG. 87(b)). can be inserted. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown into the specific winning opening unit 950 through the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the rear base 941 includes an upright portion 942f that surrounds the specific winning opening 65a and is erected on the back side (opposite side to the game area), and recessed portions at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the specific winning opening 65a from the back side. and a recess 941h provided.

The standing portion 942f has an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as a front view shape of a specific winning port unit 950 described later. This makes it easier to position and dispose the specific winning hole unit 950 inside the standing portion 942f.

The concave portion 941h is located at a position corresponding to the wall portion 953d into which the rod member 952 serving as the rotating shaft of the plate member 951 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is inserted when the specific winning opening unit 950 is arranged on the rear base 941. It is formed. As a result, when the rod member 952 is displaced in the direction in which it escapes from the plate member 951, the end face of the rod member 952 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recess 941h, thereby preventing the rod member 952 from slipping out of the plate member 951.

Further, the front base 942 includes a bulging portion 942h that bulges out between the opposing standing portion 942f and the second ball feeding portion 942c, and a first guide wall 942b side from the outer peripheral surface of the standing portion 942f (Fig. 87(b)). ) and a second guide wall 942d projecting upward).

The bulging portion 942h bulges toward the rear side of the rear base 941 and is connected to the standing portion 942f and the second ball feeding portion 942c. As a result, when a displacement member 966 (see FIG. 90), which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the rear base 941 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. A predetermined gap can be formed. As a result, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the friction (sliding) resistance of the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

The second guide wall 942d is a wall surface that guides the displacement of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966, and the distance dimension between the pair of opposing second guide walls 942d is slightly larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. set. Therefore, when the displacement member 966 is disposed between the pair of second guide walls 942d facing each other, the displacement distance of the lower end portion of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction can be regulated.

The rear base 941 is provided at the edges of the specific winning port 65a in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 87(b)) on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). A second out port 941f is formed by cutting out a circular shape. The second out port 941f is a notch for throwing the game ball that has flowed into the third receiving portion 944a formed in the front base 943 to the back side of the base plate 60 (opposite side to the game area). formed to a shape larger than the diameter of the

A third ball-feeding portion 942e, which is formed in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the rear and protrudes toward the rear, is formed at the edge of the second outlet 941f. As a result, the game ball thrown to the rear side through the inside of the second out port 941f can be thrown to the inside of the third ball throwing portion 942e.

The third ball-throwing portion 942e is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction of gravity as the curved portion (lower portion) of the U-shape when viewed from the rear protrudes toward the rear side, and the game ball thrown from the second out port 941f is formed. can be rolled to the rear side. A detailed description of the game ball that rolls on the inner surface of the third ball feeding portion 942e will be given later.

The front base 943 is formed in an upside down substantially T-shape that is smaller than the rear base when viewed from the front. Also, the front base 943 is formed of a colorless and transparent plate-like body. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the front base 943 and the rear base 941 can be visually recognized by the player.

The front base 943 mainly includes a second receiving portion 943c and a third receiving portion 944a protruding from positions corresponding to the second winning opening 140 and the second out opening 941f of the rear base 941 described above. It is formed.

The second receiving portion 943c is formed in a substantially U shape when viewed from the rear, and the second prize winning opening 140 of the rear base 941 is arranged inside when viewed from the front. A pair of feather members 945, which will be described later, are arranged on the open side of the second receiving portion 943c (open side of the U-shape). Furthermore, the projecting distance of the second receiving portion 943c toward the rear base 941 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to throw a game ball between the rear base 941 and the front base 943, and suppress the game ball from flowing into the second winning port 140 from the outside between the pair of feather members 945, which will be described later. can.

The second receiving portion 943c includes a ball-feeding guide portion 943d that protrudes inward from the inner edge thereof, and a first concave portion that is circularly recessed from the rear base 941 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)). 943ca, and a rolling part 943a projecting from the inside of the curved portion toward the rear base.

A pair of ball-feeding guide portions 943d are formed on the lower side of the pair of feather members 945 in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 87(b)). Also, the pair of ball-feeding guide portions 943d are formed at positions corresponding to the front side wall portions 941b of the rear base 941, respectively, and when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are combined, the end surfaces thereof come into contact with each other. . As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the space between the pair of feather members 945 facing each other can be thrown between the facing ball guide portions 943d.

The rolling portion 943a is formed on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) between the pair of ball-feeding guide portions 943d, and the upper end surface 943a1 in the gravitational direction slopes downward toward the rear base 941 side. It is formed. Further, as described above, the rolling part 943a is arranged inside the recessed part 941j in a state in which the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (combined), and the tip thereof extends from the rear surface of the rear base 941. side (FIG. 87(b) on the front side of the paper surface).

As a result, the game ball thrown between the pair of ball-throwing guide portions 943d opposed to each other can be thrown to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion, and the game ball is rolled on the upper portion of the end surface 943a1 to move the game ball to the rear side of the rear base 941. can throw to

Further, the front base 943 has an annular projection 943b projecting annularly at a position facing the first shaft hole 941d of the rear base 941 on the opening side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the second receiving portion 943c. The annular protrusion 943b has a second shaft hole 943b1 on its inner edge, and the other end of a shaft member 945a that pivotally supports a feather member 945 described later can be inserted inside the second shaft hole 943b1. As described above, one end of the shaft member 945 a is inserted into the first shaft hole 941 d of the rear base 941 . Therefore, the shaft member 945a can be sandwiched and supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other.

The third receiving portion 944a is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, and the second outlet 941f of the rear base 941 is disposed inside thereof. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be made to flow into the inside of the third receiving portion 944a, and the game balls flowing into the third receiving portion 944a can be transferred to the rear surface through the second out port 941f. You can throw the ball to the side (the side opposite to the play area).

A first concave portion 943ca and a second concave portion 944a1 are formed in a circular shape from the rear base 941 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 87(b)) in the second receiving portion 943c and the third receiving portion 944a. The first recessed portion 943ca and the second recessed portion 944a1 are portions to be fastened to which the screw inserted into the second through hole 941a2 described above is screwed, and are formed coaxially with the axis of the second through hole 941a2 of the rear base 941. be done. Thereby, the rear base 941 and the front base 943 can be fastened.

A pair of feather members 945 are arranged with the second prize winning opening 140 formed in the rear base 941 interposed therebetween when viewed from the front. The feather member 945 is made of a colored translucent material, and is visible to the player through the front base 943 .

The feather member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a thickness smaller than the space between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. The feather member 945 mainly includes an insertion hole 945c penetrating in the thickness direction (from the rear base 941 side to the front base 943 side) and a projection 945b protruding from the rear base 941 side surface (back surface).

The insertion hole 945c is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 945a supported between the rear base 941 and the front base 943 facing each other. Therefore, when the rear base 941 and the front base 943 are fastened (assembled), the shaft member 945a is inserted into the insertion hole 945c so that the blade member 945 can be rotated. It can be arranged between opposing sides. As a result, the feather member 945 can be displaced between a closed state in which the opposing side surfaces are parallel to the direction of gravity, and an open state in which one side of the side surface is displaced outward in the opposing direction.

The protrusion 945b is connected to a displacement member 966, which will be described later, and is a transmission portion that transmits the drive of the drive unit 960 to the blade member 945. It is set to a dimension that protrudes to the back side of the back base 941 (the side opposite to the game area). A detailed description of the connection state between the projection 945b and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

A detailed description of displacement member 966 will now be provided with reference to FIG. 90(a) is a front view of the displacement member 966, FIG. 90(b) is a side view of the displacement member 966, and FIG. 90(c) is a perspective front view of the displacement member 966. FIG.

The displacement member 966 is formed of a vertically long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c penetrating therethrough in the plate thickness direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 90(b)) substantially at the center position when viewed from the front. The second opening 966c has an inner edge shape larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941 described above when viewed from the front, and the second winning opening 140 is arranged inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning hole 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966 .

The displacement member 966 has a protrusion 966a that protrudes in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 90(a)) from one end (upper side in FIG. 90(a)) in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 90(a)). A bulging portion 966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 90(b)) toward the back side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)) is provided.

The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 966a2 formed through the displacement member 966 in the plate thickness direction, and contact portions 966a1 positioned on both lateral sides of the displacement member 966 and extending in the longitudinal direction. Prepare.

The sliding groove 966a2 is an elongated hole into which the protrusion 945b of the blade member 945 described above is inserted, and is formed in an elongated hole elongated in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. As shown in FIG. Further, the width dimension of the sliding groove 966a2 is set larger than the width dimension of the projection 945b in the radial direction of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the blade member 945. As shown in FIG. As a result, when the feather member 945 rotates, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 945b from coming into contact with both inner surfaces of the slide groove 966a2 facing each other in the width direction, and restricting the movement of the feather member 945.

The contact portion 966a1 is formed to bulge on the front side (the side of the front base 943 (see FIG. 85)) and the side of the rear side (the side of the rear base 941). As a result, the contact area between the displacement member 966, the front base 943, and the later-described drive unit 960 can be reduced. As a result, resistance when the displacement member 966 is driven can be reduced.

The bulging portion 966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back base 941 side), and a laterally long rectangular connecting hole 966b1 is formed in the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted. A detailed description of the connection state between the connection hole 966b1 and the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The connecting hole 966b1 is formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966, and is connected to the one-side abutted portion 966b2 on the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in the gravitational direction (upper side in FIG. 90(a))). , and the other side abutted portion 966b3 on the inner peripheral surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The one-side abutted portion 966b2 is a surface with which a bulging portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, abuts. The displacing member 966 can displace the feather member 945 to the open state (see FIG. 92) by being slidably displaced when the bulging portion 965e1 is brought into contact with the one-side abutted portion 966b2.

The other-side contacted portion 966b3 is a surface with which a side surface opposite to a bulging portion 965e1 of an insertion portion 965e of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, contacts. The displacement member 966 is slidably displaced when the side surface opposite to the bulging portion 965e1 is brought into contact with the other abutted portion 966b3, thereby displacing the feather member 945 to the closed state (see FIG. 91). can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, the connection state between the displacement member 966 and the feather member 945 will be described in detail. 91 and 92 are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 and the displacement member 966 in the range XCI of FIG. 87(b). 91 and 92, the outer shape of the feather member 945 is illustrated with a dashed line. 91 illustrates the closed state of the wing members 945, and FIG. 92 illustrates the open state of the wing members 945. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the protrusion 945b of the blade member 945 is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is formed parallel to the facing surfaces of the pair of blade members 945 in the closed state. Mainly a surface 945b1, a third surface 945b3 connected to the first surface 945b1 and located on one side in the direction of gravity (the side of the specific winning opening 65a), and a second surface 945b2 connected to the first surface 945b1 and the third surface 945b3. Prepare for.

The sliding groove 966a2 has a lower inner surface 966a4 located on one side in the direction of gravity (connection hole 966b1 side) and in contact with the protrusion 945b to displace the blade member 945 to the open state. An upper inner surface 966a3 that abuts against the blade member 945b to displace the feather member 945 to the closed state, and an inner side of the displacement member 966 in the transverse direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) from the outer side of the displacement member 966 toward the lower inner surface 966a4. and an inclined surface 966a5 that inclines to .

Note that the displacement member 966 is disposed so as to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 91) with respect to the rear base 941 by a transmission member 965 which will be described later. The feather member 945 is closed when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the specific winning opening 65a (lower side in FIG. 91), and when the displacement member 966 is displaced toward the second winning opening 140 (upper side in FIG. 91). It is in an open state.

Next, the connection between the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 and the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 will be described. As described above, the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is arranged inside the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the blade member 945 is closed, the projection 945b is arranged on the inclined surface 966a5 side of the sliding groove 966a2 (outside the displacement member 966 in the transverse direction). From this state, when the displacement member 966 is displaced to the second prize winning opening 140 side (the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91)), the lower inner surface 966a4 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the third surface 945b3 of the projection 945b. The protrusion 945b is displaced in contact with it. Thereby, the feather member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Here, a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a pair of feather members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance for opening or closing the ball entrance, and a pair of feather members for opening or closing the ball entrance 2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that includes driving means for generating a driving force for rotating wing members and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a pair of wing members. The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end of the rotating member is connected to a projecting portion projecting from the rear surface of the pair of feather members. Specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, opposed portions are formed which face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and the projecting portion of the feather member is inserted between the opposed portions. Therefore, when the rotary member is rotated, the facing portion of the rotary member pushes up or pushes down the projecting portion of the wing member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member is unstable. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for the opening and closing operation of the wing member, the posture of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the protruding portion, but the facing distance between the facing portions is equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion. Then, the projecting portion interferes between the opposed portions, and the rotary member cannot be rotated. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing parts to a size that does not interfere with the projecting part, and the gap between the facing part and the projecting part is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing members are likely to rattle, and the opening and closing operations of the wing members are not stable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism includes a transmission member 965 rotated by the driving force of the drive means (driving unit 960) and a displacement member 966 slidably displaced as the transmission member 965 rotates. A projection 945b is projected from a pair of feather members 945, and a sliding groove 966a2 into which the projection 945b is slidably inserted is recessed in the displacement member 966, so that the sliding groove 966a2 The groove width can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 966 is sliding displacement, and the attitude of the sliding groove 966a2 is not inclined with respect to the projection 945b, so there is no need to avoid interference with the projecting portion during rotation unlike the conventional product. Therefore, the groove width of the sliding groove 966a2 can be approximated to the size of the protrusion 945b, and the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b can be reduced. As a result, rattling of the feather member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the feather member 945 can be stabilized. Further, since the direction of displacement of the displacement member 966 is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation shafts of the pair of feather members 945 , the displacement member 966 can be arranged substantially parallel to the feather members 945 . As a result, the space required for arranging the feather member 945 and the displacement member 966 can be reduced, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. That is, when the displacement member 966 is displaced, the displacement member 966 is not displaced in the rotation axis direction of the pair of feather members 945, so the space required for disposing the displacement member in the rotation axis direction of the pair of feather members 945 is suppressed. can. As a result, a space for arranging other members can be secured.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotating member is directly connected to the pair of blade members, in the present invention, the displacement member 966 is interposed between the blade member 945 and the transmission member 965, so that the displacement member 966 is moved in the direction of gravity. At the time of operation in the direction of sliding displacement upward (the other side in the gravity direction), the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, and the inertial force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means (solenoid 610 described later) increases. . Therefore, it is difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the blade member 945 in the stopped state and displacing it to the open state or the closed state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the projection 945b is positioned downward in the direction of gravity (one side in the direction of gravity) of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the blade member 945. be located. That is, the position of the protrusion 945b when the displacement member 966 starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity (the other side in the direction of gravity) is set below the rotational axis of the feather member 945 along the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement component of the projection 945b pushed up by the inner wall of the slide groove 966a2 can be increased in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 91) and decreased in the gravitational direction (downward direction in FIG. 91). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, the initial operation when starting to drive the blade member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) to open or close can be performed smoothly.

Further, the center of gravity of the feather member 945 is set on the opposite side of the projection 945b across the rotation shaft (insertion hole 945c). As a result, when the feather member 945 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the feather member 945 can be displaced to the open state using its own weight. That is, when the displacement member 966 starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity (one side in the direction of gravity), the blade member 945 is rotated in the direction in which it is opened, so the blade member 945 is rotated by its weight (self weight). can be made Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the displacement member 966 is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the blade member 945 in the stopped state (closed state) and opening it.

Furthermore, the inclined surface 966a5 described above is formed on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 91)) of the rotating shaft (insertion hole 945c) of the feather member 945 . As a result, even when the position of the projection 945b is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotating shaft of the feather member 945, the projection 945b can be guided along the direction of inclination of the inclined surface 966a5, thereby displacing the displacement member. 966 can be smoothly started to slide toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity).

Further, by forming the inclined surface 966a5 on the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2, not only can the gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the projection 945b be reduced, but also the projection 945b to the inclined surface 966a5 can be reduced. , the horizontal displacement of the protrusion 945b can be restricted in addition to the displacement thereof in the direction of gravity. Therefore, rattling of the feather member 945 in the closed state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by the vibration accompanying the falling game ball, the feather member 945 can be easily maintained in the open posture or the closed posture.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the feather member 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the displacement member 966 moves from the second winning opening 140 side to the specific winning opening 65a side (one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 92). side)). As a result, the upper inner surface 966a3 of the displacement member 966 comes into contact with the first surface 945b1 of the protrusion 945b, thereby displacing the protrusion 945b. Thereby, the feather member 945 can be rotationally displaced.

Further, the displacement direction of the displacement member 966 from the side of the second winning opening 140 to the side of the specific winning opening 65a is set in the direction of gravity (downward in FIG. 92). Thereby, when the feather member 945 is closed, the feather member 945 can be displaced using the weight of the displacement member 966 . As a result, the feather member 945 can be easily displaced from the open state to the closed state.

A detailed description of the drive unit 960 will now be provided with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95 . 93(a) is a side view of the drive unit 960, FIG. 93(b) is a top view of the drive unit 960, and FIG. 93(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 960. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of drive unit 960, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective rear view of drive unit 960. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the drive unit 960 includes a first housing portion 962 and a second housing portion 963 which are formed in a box shape and arranged to face each other, and a first housing portion 962 and a second housing portion. A solenoid 610 disposed in a space between 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and pivotally supported by the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964. A transmission member 965 is mainly provided.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. ), and a guide portion 962b protruding toward the center.

The covering portion 962a is formed in a substantially box shape with the solenoid 610 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)) and the guide portion 962b side being open. In addition, the covering portion 962a includes an engaged portion 962c formed by cutting out a part of the opposing wall surface, and a fastening portion 962d projecting outward from the opposing wall surface in the facing direction.

The engaged portion 962c is a notch that engages with an engaging portion 963c of a second housing portion 963, which will be described later. As a result, the engaging portion 963c can be engaged with the engaged portion 962c before the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are fastened. It is possible to improve the workability of fastening with.

The fastening portion 962d is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing portion 963 in the assembled state of the drive unit 960, and extends toward the second housing portion 963 side (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). It has a through hole 962da penetrating therethrough.

The through hole 962da is a hole through which a screw (not shown) to be screwed into the fastening hole 963b1 of the second housing portion 963 is inserted. formed in Thereby, the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 can be fastened and fixed.

The guide portion 962b is connected to a pair of arm portions 962e formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side and connected to the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a. A wall portion 962f is formed, and a protruding portion 962g protrudes from the wall portion 962f on the side opposite to the covering portion 962a (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)).

The arm portions 962e protrude toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85) from the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a, and the protruding tip sides thereof are bent toward the other side in the direction of gravity (the side opposite to the solenoid 610 side) in a side view. It is formed in a substantially L shape. In addition, the pair of arm portions 962e are set so that the distance between the opposing sides is substantially the same as the distance between the horizontal ends of the side wall portions 981b (see FIG. 109(a)) of the sorting unit 980, which will be described later. Part 981b is inserted.

The wall portion 962f is formed by connecting the side surfaces of the arm portions 962e on the distal end side (bent side), and has a shape larger than that of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front. In addition, the wall portion 962f has an outer distance dimension L3 (see FIG. 93(b)) in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) in the facing direction of the pair of first guide walls 942b of the rear base 941 described above. is set to be substantially the same as the outer distance dimension L4 (see FIG. 91) in (L3=L4). Further, the wall portion 962f is such that the distance dimension L5 (see FIG. 93(a)) in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(a)) extends from the upper end surface of the first guide wall 942b of the rear base 941 to the standing portion 942f. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 91) to the outer surface (L5=L6). Thereby, the displacement member 966 can be disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941, and the displacement member 966 can be accommodated between the first guide walls 942b. Furthermore, the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 disposed between the wall portion 962f and the rear base 941 can be arranged between the opposing sides.

The protruding portion 962g is formed to protrude from the outside of the wall portion 962f in the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) to the side opposite to the arm portion 962e. It is set substantially the same as the projection dimension of the first guide wall 942b. In addition, the inner dimension L7 of the protruding portion 962g in the facing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) is slightly larger than the outer dimension L8 (see FIG. 91) of the pair of second guide walls 942d of the rear base 941 in the facing direction. set large. Furthermore, the projecting portion 962g has a dimension in the direction of gravity set substantially equal to the dimension between the first guide wall 942b and the standing portion 942f.

Accordingly, when the drive unit 960 in the assembled state is arranged on the rear base 941 (the front unit 940), the second guide wall 942d is inserted between the opposed projecting portions 962g, and the first guide wall 942b and the first guide wall 942b The drive unit 960 can be positioned and disposed with respect to the rear base 941 by inserting the protruding portion 962g between the opposing standing portions 942f.

The second housing portion 963 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is formed into a box-like body that covers the other side of the solenoid 610 (lower side in FIG. 93(a)). The second housing portion 963 is formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the driving direction of the solenoid 610 (horizontal direction in FIG. 93(b)) when viewed from above. In addition, the second housing portion 963 includes recessed portions 963e that are recessed at a plurality of locations on both wall portions that extend in the longitudinal direction, and the recessed portions 963e that extend from between the plurality of recessed portions 963e to the first housing portion 962 side. an engaging portion 963c protruding in the longitudinal direction, a protruding portion 963b protruding in the lateral direction from both wall portions extending in the longitudinal direction, and one side extending in the lateral direction (the rear base 941 side (see FIG. 85). ) and a bearing portion 963d recessed in the wall portion of .

The projecting portion 963b is formed to protrude outward in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 in a semicircular shape, and includes a fastening hole 963b1 coaxial with the through hole 962da of the first accommodating portion 962 . As a result, the first accommodation portion 962 and the second accommodation portion 963 can be fastened and fixed by screwing a screw inserted from the through hole 962da side of the first accommodation portion 962 into the fastening hole 963b1.

The recessed portion 963e is an opening for circulating air in the space formed between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 facing each other. By circulating air through the recessed portion 963e, the solenoid 610 disposed between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 can be cooled.

The engaging portion 963c protrudes toward the first housing portion 962 from between a plurality of recessed portions 963e arranged side by side, and has a hook-shaped tip that is bent inward in the width direction of the second housing portion 963. be. Further, as described above, the engaging portion 963c is formed at a position corresponding to the engaged portion 962c of the first accommodating portion 962, and when the first accommodating portion 962 and the second accommodating portion 963 are combined, The engaging portion 963c is arranged inside the engaged portion 962c, and the bent portion of the engaging portion 963c is engaged with one side end surface of the first accommodating portion 962. As shown in FIG.

Moreover, since the engaging portion 963c is formed between the recessed portions 963e, the distance from the proximal end to the distal end of the engaging portion 963c can be increased. Therefore, when the engaging portion 963c is arranged in the first accommodating portion 962, the engaging portion 963c can be easily bent, and the engaging portion 963c can be easily engaged with the first accommodating portion 962. FIG.

The bearing portion 963d is a recess that accommodates a rotating shaft 965c of a transmission member 965, which will be described later, and is recessed in a shape larger than the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c. The end surface of the bearing portion 963d on the side of the first accommodation portion 962 is covered with the side surface of the first accommodation portion 962 on one side in the direction of gravity, and the first accommodation portion 962 and the second accommodation portion 963 are combined. In this state, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft 965c accommodated in the bearing portion 963d from coming off to the outside of the bearing portion 963d.

The solenoid 610 includes a main body portion 961a formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, a shaft portion 961b inserted into the main body portion 961a and displaceable with respect to the main body portion 961a, and a side of the shaft portion 961b opposite to the main body portion 961a. and a coil spring SP1 disposed between the annular portion 961c and the body portion 961a.

The body portion 961a is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the magnetism allows the shaft portion 961b to be inserted into the body portion 961a to be pulled inward and inserted.

The shaft portion 961b is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 961b is arranged in a direction in which the axial direction faces the rear base 941 side, and is arranged in a state where a portion on the rear base 941 side protrudes from the main body portion 961a.

The annular portion 961c is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 961b protruding from the body portion 961a. A connecting member 964, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 961c. Accordingly, when the shaft portion 961b is displaced with respect to the main body portion 961a, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 961c to the connecting member 964, and the connecting member 964 can be displaced.

The coil spring SP1 is a spring member that is spirally wound multiple times. The coil spring SP1 is arranged around the shaft portion 961b and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the annular ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a. As a result, the annular portion 961c can be biased in a direction away from the body portion 961a. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a, the annular portion 961c can be kept separated from the main body portion 961a. In addition, when the application (supply) of electric power is interrupted after the application (supply) of power to the body portion 961a, the ring portion 961c can be quickly separated from the body portion 961a.

The connecting member 964 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connection member 964 includes a base portion 964a formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane perpendicular to the axis of the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and a rear base 941 side (FIG. 85) from the other side of the base portion 964a in the gravitational direction. (see reference), and an upright portion 964b that bends to the side.

The base portion 964a is a portion that is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610, and is recessed from the end face on one side in the direction of gravity (back side of the paper in FIG. 93(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 961c. and a second recessed portion 964d located on the solenoid 610 side of the first recessed portion 964c and recessed with a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 961b.

The first recessed portion 964c is a groove into which the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape with one open side in the direction of gravity in a cross-sectional view. Further, the groove width of the first concave portion 964c is set larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 961c. Thereby, the annular portion 961c can be inserted into the first concave portion 964c.

The second recessed portion 964d is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 961b and the base portion 964a when the annular portion 961c is disposed inside the first recessed portion 964c as described above. It is formed in a substantially U-shape with an open bottom when viewed from the back, and is formed so as to open from the side of the first concave portion 964c to the side of the solenoid 610. As shown in FIG.

The upright portion 964b has an insertion hole 964e penetrating in the gravitational direction, and a projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965, which will be described later, is inserted into the insertion hole 964e. Accordingly, when the connecting member 964 is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 610, the protrusion 965d comes into contact with the inner edge of the insertion hole 964e and the transmission member 965 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 will be given later.

The transmission member 965 is formed to be bent when viewed from the side, and includes a distal end portion 965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and a rotating shaft portion 965a connected to the distal end portion 965a and extending toward the connecting member 964 side. 965b.

The rotating portion 965b is formed such that the width dimension in the lateral direction of the second accommodating portion 963 (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) is smaller than the dimension between the opposing bearing portions 963d formed in the second accommodating portion 963. be done. In addition, the rotating portion 965b has a rotating shaft 965c that protrudes in a columnar shape on both sides of the second housing portion 963 in the lateral direction (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)) at the end on the 964 side, and and a protrusion 965d that protrudes toward one end in the direction of gravity.

The rotating shaft 965c is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the groove width of the bearing portion 963d, as described above. In addition, the pair of rotating shafts 965 c is set such that the distance between the protruding tips thereof is larger than the distance dimension between the pair of facing bearing portions 963 d formed in the second housing portion 963 . Thereby, the pair of rotating shafts 965c can be inserted and disposed inside the bearing portion 963d. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 965c into the bearing portion 963d and fastening the second accommodating portion 963 and the first accommodating portion 962, the transmission member 965 can be supported in a rotatable state about the rotating shaft 965c.

As described above, the projecting portion 965d is a projection inserted into the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964, and its outer shape is set smaller than the inner edge shape of the insertion hole 964e when viewed from above. In addition, in the state before the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is displaced (power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a), the width dimension of the protrusion portion 965d in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 is It is set sufficiently larger than the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e (in this embodiment, the width dimension of the insertion hole 964e is set to be twice the width dimension of the projecting portion 965d). As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced about the rotation shaft 965c, the projections 965d on both end surfaces of the shaft portion 961b in the displacement direction abut against the insertion holes 964e, thereby restricting the rotation of the transmission member 965. can be suppressed.

The tip portion 965a is formed so that the width dimension in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c decreases as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. The distal end portion 965a has an insertion portion 965e that is inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, and an upright portion 965f that protrudes from the connection side of the rotating portion 965b in the direction of gravity. formed with

The insertion portion 965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front, and is inserted through the inner side of the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, when the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 come into contact with each other and the displacement member 966 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 965 and the displacement member 966 will be given later.

Next, referring to FIG. 96, the displacement operation of drive unit 960 will be described. 96(a) and 96(b) are cross-sectional views of the drive unit 960 along line XCVI--XCVI in FIG. 93(b). 96(a) shows the state before the solenoid 610 operates, and FIG. 96(b) shows the state after the solenoid 610 operates. 96(a) and 96(b), the outer shape of the rotating shaft 965c of the transmission member 965 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the coil spring SP1 disposed between the body portion 961a and the annular portion 961c is attached. The annular portion 961c is separated from the body portion 961a by force. As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is pushed out in the direction (left side in FIG. 96(a)) away from the body portion 961a.

When the connecting member 964 is pushed away from the body portion 961a, the projection 965d of the transmission member 965 faces the solenoid 610 (right side in FIG. 96(a)) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 faces the solenoid 610. is in contact with the inner surface of the As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed down to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 96(a)) about the rotating shaft 965c. Displacement of the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to one side in the direction of gravity is restricted by the contact portion 965g coming into contact with the second accommodating portion 963 .

As shown in FIG. 96(b), when power is applied (supplied) to the body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the shaft portion 961b is drawn into the body portion 961a by the magnetic force generated in the body portion 961a. The ring portion 961c and the main body portion 961a are brought closer (compared to a state in which power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a). As a result, the connecting member 964 connected to the annular portion 961c is displaced in the direction (right side in FIG. 96(a)) approaching the body portion 961a.

When the connecting member 964 is displaced toward the body portion 961a, the surface of the projecting portion 965d of the transmission member 965 opposite to the solenoid 610 (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) and the insertion hole 964e of the connecting member 964 are aligned. The solenoid 610 side and the inner surface on the opposite side (the left side in FIG. 96(b)) are in contact with each other. As a result, the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is pushed up to the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in FIG. 96B) about the rotating shaft 965c. Displacement of the distal end portion 965 a of the transmission member 965 to the other side in the direction of gravity is restricted by the connecting portion between the distal end portion 965 a of the transmission member 965 and the rotating portion 965 b coming into contact with the first accommodating portion 962 .

Therefore, by displacing the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 to either the other side in the gravity direction or the one side in the gravity direction, the transmission member 965 is moved to either the first accommodation portion 962 or the second accommodation portion 963. can be abutted. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating by the player.

For example, when a player inserts a piano wire or the like from the player side (game area side) into the gap between the transmission member 965 and the first housing portion 962 or the second housing portion 963 to the solenoid 610, the thickness of the piano wire is increased. Accordingly, the displacement distance of the transmission member 965 can be reduced. Therefore, since an abnormality occurs in the displacement operation of the feather member 945 displaced by the transmission member 965, it is easy for the store operator to discover the fraud.

Further, as described above, the transmission member 965 includes a distal end portion 965a and a rotating portion 965b extending from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the displacement member 966, and a rotating portion 965a extending from the rotating shaft 965c and connected to the solenoid 610. The distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent in a substantially dogleg shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c. , the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed.

That is, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is the same as that of the distal end portion 965a of the present embodiment. If it is set to be approximately equal to the distance including the rotating portion 965b, the sliding displacement amount of the displacement member 966 can be made equivalent to that of the present embodiment, but the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 increases, The whole becomes large.

On the other hand, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are formed linearly when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, and the length dimension distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is rotated from the insertion portion 965e of the present embodiment. When the distance dimension to the shaft 965c is set to be substantially the same (the distance between the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b is shortened), the distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be made equivalent to that of the present embodiment. However, the displacement amount of the displacement member 966 becomes small.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b are bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c, so that the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced. The distance between the solenoid 610 and the displacement member 966 can be suppressed while securing the amount. Also, the projecting portion 965d is formed on the rear side (the right side in FIG. 96(a)) of the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b opposite to the displacement member 966. As shown in FIG. As a result, the transmission member 965 can be miniaturized by effectively utilizing the space created by bending the distal end portion 965a and the rotating portion 965b. That is, the transmission member 965 is efficiently disposed in the space between the rolling portion 943a (ball throwing unit 970 described later) of the front unit 940 and the passage member 955 of the specific prize winning port unit 950, thereby reducing the overall size. can be achieved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the connection between drive unit 960 and displacement member 966 will be described in detail. 97 is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along line XCVII--XCVII in FIG. 98(a) and 98(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 930 taken along line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 98(a) shows the state before the solenoid 610 operates, and FIG. 98(b) shows the state after the solenoid 610 operates.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, when the drive unit 960 and the front unit 940 are assembled, the tip 965a of the transmission member 965 is inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. As shown in FIGS.

Therefore, as described above, when the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 is driven and the distal end portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is displaced to the other side in the gravitational direction (upward in FIG. 98(a)), FIGS. As shown in FIG. 98(b), the bulging portion 965e1 of the insertion portion 965e and the contacted portion 966b2 on one side of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 come into contact with each other, and the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the gravity direction. be done.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to the other side in the gravitational direction (the side of the second winning opening 140), the projection 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced and the feather member 945 is opened. That is, by applying electric power to the body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the feather member 945 is brought into an open state.

On the other hand, when the application (supply) of electric power to the body portion 961a of the solenoid 610 is cut off, the tip portion 965a of the transmission member 965 is aligned in the direction of gravity due to the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 disposed in the solenoid 610 as described above. side (lower side in FIG. 98(a)). As a result, as shown in FIG. 98(a), the opposite surface of the bulging portion 965e1 contacts the contact portion 966b3 on the other side of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966, causing the displacement member 966 to move to one side in the direction of gravity. Slide is displaced.

As described above, when the displacement member 966 is slid to one side in the gravitational direction (the side of the specific winning opening 65a), the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced, and the feather member 945 is closed. That is, by cutting off the application (supply) of electric power to the main body portion 961a of the solenoid 610, the feather member 945 is brought into the closed state.

In this case, since the blade member 945 can be in the closed state while the application (supply) of power to the body portion 961a is cut off, the body portion 961a can be closed due to disconnection of the wiring of the body portion 961a or due to fraud by the player. When the wiring is cut, it is possible to prevent the feather member 945 from being in the open state and the game ball from easily flowing into the second winning hole 140 .

Further, the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965 is transmitted to the displacement member 966 through a connecting hole 966b1 formed at a substantially intermediate position of the displacement member 966 in the lateral direction. Thereby, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 . Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be smoothly slid with the rotation of the transmission member. As a result, the feather member 945 can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the transmission member 965 rotates, the displacement member 966 is slid and displaced to open or close the pair of feather members 945. Only one of the pair of feather members 945 receives the load from the game ball. When acted on, the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed, and the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of feather members 945 at two points, and is also connected to the transmission member 965 at two points. In this case, it is difficult to allow a change in the posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965, and the resistance when the displacement member 966 is slidably displaced (that is, the transmission member 965 is rotated) is occurs and obstructs the opening or closing of the wing members. In contrast, according to the present invention, the displacement member 966 is connected to the pair of feather members 945 at two points and is connected to the transmission member 965 at one point. Even if the load from the game ball acts on only one of the 945, it is possible to easily allow the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965.

Furthermore, the width dimension D1 (see FIG. 98(a)) of the abutment surface between the one side abutted portion 966b2 and the other side abutted portion 966b3 of the insertion portion 965e is equal to the maximum outer dimension D2 (FIG. 98A) of the protrusion 945b. (a)) is set smaller than three times. This makes it easier to allow the change in posture of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 . That is, when the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is set large, when the posture of the displacement member 966 is changed between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965, the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1 are displaced. The position of the displacement member 966 is restricted by setting the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e to be smaller than three times the maximum outer dimension D2 of the protrusion 945b. Controlling change can be suppressed. As a result, the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily allowed.

Note that the width dimension D1 of the insertion portion 965e is preferably set smaller than twice the maximum outer dimension D2 of the projection 945b. According to this, when the posture of the displacement member 966 changes, it is possible to easily suppress the contact between the insertion portion 965e and the connecting hole 966b1. As a result, the posture change of the displacement member 966 between the pair of feather members 945 and the transmission member 965 can be easily allowed.

Next, the specific winning slot unit 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 99(a) is a front view of the specific winning slot unit 950, FIG. 99(b) is a rear view of the specific winning slot unit 950, and FIG. 99(c) is a top view of the specific winning slot unit 950. It is a diagram. 100 is an exploded perspective front view of the specific winning hole unit 950, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective rear view of the specific winning hole unit 950. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the specific winning hole unit 950 includes a ball entry member 953 formed in a box-like body that opens toward the player side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 99), and the opening of the ball entry member 953. A plate member 951 arranged to cover a portion, a passage member 955 arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 951 with the ball-entering member 953 interposed therebetween, and a drive unit 957 for operating the plate member 951. It is formed.

The plate member 951 is made of a colored translucent resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the side of the entering ball member 953 via the plate member 951 . The plate member 951 includes a main body portion 951a formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front; and an engaging portion 951d protruding toward the ball-entering member 953 from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 951a.

The body portion 951a is formed in a size that covers the open side of the ball entry member 953, which will be described later, when viewed from the front, and has a shape that is slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the specific winning port 65a of the front unit 940 described above. .

The shaft hole 951b is formed on one side of the main body 951a in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), and both ends in the longitudinal direction are coaxially set. Further, the shaft hole 951b is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 952, which will be described later, so that the rod member 952 can be inserted inside. Therefore, the plate member 951 can be pivotally supported with respect to the ball-entering member 953 by supporting the ball-entering member 953 while the rod member 952 is inserted into the shaft hole 951b.

The protrusion 951c is formed to protrude from one side in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 951a. As a result, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b by the driving of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, and the other side of the plate member 951 in the direction of gravity is inclined toward the game area, the body portion 951a It is possible to prevent the falling game ball from falling from one side in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 951a.

The engaging portion 951d has a recessed portion 951d1 that is partially recessed at the projecting tip. A distal end portion 958c of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is connected to the inside of the concave portion 951d1, and the operation of the drive unit 957 is transmitted. In addition, when the plate member 951 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 951b, the engaging portion 951d partially protrudes toward the flow-down area side, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the main body portion 951a can be suppressed from falling from the other side in the longitudinal direction.

The ball entry member 953 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The ball-entering member 953 includes a main body portion 953a formed in a horizontally long rectangular box shape when viewed from the front; an engaging portion 953f protruding from the surface opposite to the main body portion 953a; A wall portion 953d projecting from both longitudinal direction outer sides of the edge portion toward the plate member 951 side, an insertion hole 953e penetrating from the passage member 955 side to the plate member 951 side on the other side of the main body portion 953a in the longitudinal direction, and the main body Projecting portions 953g projecting from both ends in the longitudinal direction of the portion 953a, projections 953h projecting from the open-side edge portion of the main body portion 953a toward the plate member 951, and two portions penetrating the bottom surface of the main body portion 953a. , and an inflow port 953j.

The body portion 953a is formed in a box-shaped inner portion with a size that allows game balls to pass through, and has an opening 953a1 that opens toward the plate member 951 and a rolling surface that rolls the game balls flowing in from the opening 953a1. 953a2. Further, the outer shape of the main body portion 953a in a front view is formed slightly smaller than the inner edge shape of the standing portion 942f of the front unit 940 described above. As a result, the main body portion 953a (ball entry member 953) can be inserted inside the standing portion 942f and fastened and fixed to the front unit 940. As shown in FIG. A detailed description of the inner shape of the main body portion 953a will be given later.

In addition, the longitudinal dimension of the main body portion 953a is set larger than the spaced distance of the pair of feather members 945 on the outside in the opposing direction. Thereby, even when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the outer peripheral surface of the pair of feather members 945, the game ball can be made to flow into the main body portion 953a through the specific winning hole 65a.

The shape of the inner edge of the opening 953a1 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and when the plate member 951 is in the open state, the game ball can flow into the main body portion 953a through the opening 953a1. can.

The rolling surface 953a2 is the inner edge of the main body 953a on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. In addition, the dimension in the direction (transverse direction) from the back side (passage member 955 side) to the front side (plate member 951 side) is formed larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball thrown from the opening 953a1 to the inner side of the main body portion 953a can be rolled on the rolling surface 953a2.

The standing wall 953b is a wall that holds the detection device SE1 arranged on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and surrounds the three-direction outer peripheral surfaces of the detection device SE1 that is formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear. formed to size.

The engaging portion 953f is formed along the outer peripheral surface of the detection device SE1 except for the three directions surrounded by the standing wall 953b. As a result, the detection device SE1 can be arranged inside the portion surrounded by the standing wall 953b and the engaging portion 953f. In addition, the engaging portion 953f is bent toward the standing wall 953b at a distal end portion separated from the proximal end by a distance corresponding to the thickness of the detection device SE1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detecting device SE1 and the engaging portion 953f from coming off due to the engagement of the detecting device SE1 and the engaging portion 953f.

The detection device SE1 is a device for detecting passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE1 in its thickness direction. The detection hole SE1a is formed in either one or the other of the longitudinal directions of the detection device SE1, which is arranged in a horizontally long rectangular state when viewed from the rear. Alternatively, a detection substrate SE1b for controlling the detection device SE1 is disposed on one side. Further, the detection hole SE1a is arranged at a position corresponding to an inflow port 953j, which will be described later, and allows game balls flowing into the inflow port 953j to pass therethrough.

The annular protrusion 953c is formed to protrude from a plurality of annular portions on the side opposite to the open side of the main body portion 953a, and a screw for fastening and fixing the passage member 955 and the entrance member 953 is screwed to the inner edge portion of the annular protrusion 953c.

A pair of wall portions 953d are formed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a, and the distance dimension between the opposing walls is formed shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the plate member 951 . Thereby, the plate member 951 can be disposed between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other.

The wall portion 953d is formed with a circular shaft hole 953d1 penetrating in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a (horizontal direction in FIG. 99(a)). The shaft hole 953 d 1 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the shaft hole 951 b of the plate member 951 . Therefore, after disposing the plate member 951 between the pair of wall portions 953d facing each other, the plate member 951 can be moved by inserting the rod members 952 into the shaft holes 953d1 and 951b from both sides in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951. It can be pivotally supported on the ball entry member 953 .

Furthermore, the wall portion 953d is formed to have a projection dimension smaller than the recess distance of the recess 941h formed in the rear base 941 of the front unit 940 described above. Therefore, by combining the front unit 940 and the specific winning hole unit 950, the wall portion 953d can be accommodated inside the concave portion 941h. This can prevent the rod member 952 inserted into the shaft hole 953d1 and the shaft hole 951b from coming out.

The insertion hole 953e is a hole through which a part of the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955 described later is inserted toward the plate member 951, and is formed at a position corresponding to the transmission member 965 arranged in the passage member 955. be done.

The projecting portion 953g is formed to project on the axis of the connecting projection 942j of the front unit 940. As shown in FIG. In addition, in a state in which the front unit 940 and the specific winning slot unit 950 are combined, the inner circle 942j1 of the connecting projection 942j and the insertion hole 953g1 penetrating the projecting portion 953g are arranged coaxially, The provided portion 953g and the connecting projection 942j are brought into contact with each other. As a result, the specific winning opening unit 950 and the front unit 940 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the screw inserted through the insertion hole 953g1 from the specific winning opening unit 950 side into the inner circle 942j1.

The protrusion 953h is formed to protrude toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced by a drive unit 957, which will be described later, a game ball is less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the edge of the body portion 953a.

Also, the projection 953h is formed at substantially the same position in the longitudinal direction of the projection 951c of the plate member 951 and the engagement portion 951d of the plate member 951 (horizontal direction in FIG. 99(a)). This makes it difficult for the game ball to roll on the projecting side of the projection 953h. As a result, when the plate member 951 is displaced, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the plate member 951 and the protrusion 951c.

The inflow port 953j is formed by opening from the plate member 951 side to the passage member 955 side in an inner edge shape larger than the diameter of the game ball. The inflow port 953j is a hole through which a game ball that has flowed into the inside of the main body portion 953a is fed to the passage member 955, and a pair of the inflow ports 953j are formed in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a.

Here, a game comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance machine is known. The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls entered into the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. one ball at a time. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (length of the rolling surface) of the game ball from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member is correspondingly increased. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the ball entrance before the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, which tends to cause over-winning. rice field.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inlets 953j are formed in a pair (at two locations) at a predetermined interval. The rolling distance (length of rolling surface) of the game ball can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the inlet 953j can be shortened, and the liquid can be made to flow into the inlet 953j in a short period of time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the detection device SE1 for detecting the inflow of game balls into the entering ball member 953 is arranged at a connecting portion between the inflow port 953j and the concave portion 955a of the passage member 955, which will be described later. As a result, the game ball entering the opening 953a1 of the body portion 953a can be detected in a shorter time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress another game ball from being entered before the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In addition, the inlet 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap the pair of feather members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity when the front unit 940 and the specific prize winning unit 950 are fastened. That is, a pair of feather members 945 in a closed state are arranged between a pair of inlets 953j.

Here, as described above, the specific winning opening unit 950 is disposed below the second winning opening 140 (the pair of feather members 945) in the gravity direction. In addition, since the pair of feather members 945 are disposed in the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area is less likely to flow downward in the gravity direction of the pair of feather members 945 . Therefore, the inflow position of the game ball flowing into the ball entry member 953 of the specific winning port unit 950 is biased. In this embodiment, as described above, the inflow port 953j is formed at a position that does not overlap with the pair of feather members 945 in the closed state in the direction of gravity, so that the inflow port 953j is positioned at a position where many game balls flow into the ball entry member 953. The inflow port 953j can be brought closer. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the ball entering member 953 can be made to flow into the inflow port 953j in a short time. As a result, over-winning of game balls to the entering ball member 953 can be suppressed.

The passage member 955 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has an outer shape when viewed from the front that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the above-described ball-entering member 953 when viewed from the front. Further, the passage member 955 includes a pair of recessed portions 955a recessed at positions facing the detection holes SE1a of the respective detection devices SE1, and a pair of recessed portions 955a located on the other side in the longitudinal direction and extending from the drive unit 957 side to the ball entry member 953 side. a pair of third openings 955c penetrating from the driving unit 957 side to the ball entering member 953 side at both ends in the longitudinal direction; and a second recessed portion 955f located between a pair of recessed portions 955a and recessed from the drive unit 957 side.

The recessed portion 955a is a passage for guiding the game ball inserted through the detection hole SE1a, and the recessed dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 and the recessed dimension on the drive unit 957 side are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. be done.

The second opening 955b is a space in which a connecting member 957c and a transmission member 958 of the drive unit 957, which will be described later, are arranged. A shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) projecting in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 in a cylindrical shape is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the second opening 955b. The shaft portion 955b1 has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 958b of the transmission member 958, and the transmission member 958 can be supported by inserting the shaft portion 955b1 through the shaft hole 958b.

The third opening 955c is a space for arranging the detection device SE2 in which the direction of insertion of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE2 when viewed from the front. . Accordingly, the detection device SE2 can be arranged inside the third opening 955c. In addition, the detection hole SE1 of the detection device SE2 protrudes toward the ball entry member 953 when the detection device SE2 is arranged inside the third opening 955c.

An engaging portion 955e protrudes toward the drive unit 957 from the edge of the third opening 955c. The engaging portion 955e has its projecting tip bent inside the third opening 955c. When the detection device SE2 is arranged in the third opening 955c, the bent portion of the engaging portion 955e is engaged with the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the detection device SE2 inserted inside the third opening 955c from slipping out to the drive unit 957 side.

The rolling part 955d is curved in an arc shape. Further, the rolling portion 955d is connected to the third ball feeding portion 942e of the front unit 940 at its end on the side of the plate member 951 when the front unit 940 and the specific winning hole unit 950 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the second out port 941f of the front unit 940 can be thrown to the rolling portion 955d of the specific winning port unit 950 .

The other end side of the rolling portion 955d is positioned on the other side in the gravitational direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2 arranged in the third opening 955c. As a result, the game ball rolling on the rolling portion 955d can be dropped from the other end side and inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE2. As a result, the number of game balls that have flowed into the second out port 941f can be measured by the detection device SE2.

The second recessed portion 955f is formed between a pair of recessed portions 955a that serve as passages for game balls as described above. The second recessed portion 955f is a recess in which the drive unit 960 described above is arranged, and the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the passage member 955 (horizontal direction in FIG. It is set to be larger than the distance dimension in the lateral direction of the accommodation portion 963 (vertical direction in FIG. 93(b)).

The second recessed portion 955f is formed with an insertion hole 955h penetrating through the passage member 955 at a longitudinally intermediate position and a projection 955g projecting toward the drive unit 957 side. The insertion hole 955h is a hole for inserting a screw that fastens the ball insertion member 953 and the passage member 955, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The protrusion 955g is formed in a columnar shape, and has a circular fastening hole 955g1 recessed in the center thereof. The fastening hole 955g1 is a hole into which a screw for fastening the drive unit 960 and the passage member 955 (the specific winning slot unit 950) is screwed, and faces the elongated hole 963f formed in the second housing portion 963 of the drive unit 960. It is formed at the position where Thereby, the driving unit 960 and the passage member 955 (the specific winning opening unit 950) can be fastened and fixed.

The drive unit 957 is formed including a solenoid 957a, a case member 957b covering the solenoid 957a, and a connecting member 957c arranged at a displacement portion of the solenoid 957a.

The solenoid 957a includes a body portion 957a1 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, a shaft portion 957a2 inserted into the body portion 957a1 and displaceable with respect to the body portion 957a1, and a side of the shaft portion 957a2 opposite to the body portion 957a1. and a coil spring SP2 disposed between the annular portion 957a3 and the body portion 957a1.

The body portion 957a1 is a coil portion that generates magnetism when electric power is applied (supplied), and the magnetism allows the shaft portion 957a2 to be inserted into the body portion 957a1 to be drawn toward the inside of the body portion 957a1 and inserted. be done.

The shaft portion 957a2 is made of a magnetic metal material and has a cylindrical shape. The shaft portion 957a2 is arranged with its axial direction directed toward the passage member 955, and is arranged such that a part thereof on the rear base 941 side protrudes from the main body portion 957a1.

The annular portion 957a3 is arranged at the end of the shaft portion 957a2 protruding from the body portion 957a1. A connecting member 957c, which will be described later, is connected to the annular portion 957a3. Accordingly, when the shaft portion 957a2 is displaced with respect to the main body portion 957a1, the displacement is transmitted from the annular portion 957a3 to the connecting member 957c, thereby displacing the connecting member 957c.

The coil spring SP2 is a spring member that is spirally wound multiple times. The coil spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft portion 957a2 and is arranged in a slightly compressed state between the opposing annular portion 957a3 and the body portion 957a1. As a result, the annular portion 957a3 can be biased in a direction away from the body portion 957a1. Therefore, when power is not applied (supplied) to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be kept separated from the main body portion 957a1. In addition, when the application (supply) of power is interrupted after the application (supply) of power to the main body portion 957a1, the annular portion 957a3 can be quickly separated from the main body portion 957a1.

The case member 957b is formed in a box-like body that covers the body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, and one surface on the side into which the shaft portion 957a2 is inserted is open. Further, the case member 957b is formed with an insertion hole 957b1 passing through the shaft portion 957a2 in the axial direction, and an opening 957b2 penetratingly formed on the side opposite to the open side.

The insertion hole 957b1 is a screw hole for inserting a screw that fastens the passage member 955 and the case member 957b (drive unit 957), and is formed larger than the external shape of the tip of the screw. A screw inserted through the insertion hole 957 b 1 is screwed into the passage member 955 .

The opening 957b2 is formed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 957a2. Thereby, the wiring HS1 (see FIG. 105) can be connected to the body portion 957a1 through the opening 957b2.

The connecting member 957c is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. The connecting member 957c is formed in a plate-like body parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis of the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a. The connecting member 957c has a first recessed portion 957c1 recessed from the end face on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 99(b)) with a dimension larger than the diameter of the annular portion 957a3, and the first recessed portion. A second recessed portion 957c2 located on the solenoid 957a side of the 957c1 and recessed to a dimension larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 957a2, and an engaging portion 957c3 protruding toward the entering ball member 953 side.

The first recessed portion 957c1 is a groove into which the annular portion 957a3 of the solenoid 957a is inserted, and is formed in a substantially U shape with one open side in the direction of gravity when viewed in cross section. Further, the groove width of the first recessed portion 957c1 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the annular portion 957a3. As a result, the annular portion 957a3 can be inserted into the first recessed portion 957c1.

The second recessed portion 957c2 is a notch that suppresses interference between the shaft portion 957a2 and the connecting member 957c when the annular portion 957a3 is disposed inside the first recessed portion 957c1 as described above. It is formed in a substantially U shape that is open on one side in the direction of gravity when viewed from the rear, and is formed so as to open from the side of the first concave portion 957c1 to the side of the solenoid 957a.

The engaging portion 957c3 is bent in a substantially L shape when viewed from the side. A connecting portion 958a of a transmission member 958, which will be described later, is provided inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3. Accordingly, when the connecting member 957c is operated by the displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a contacts the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3 and the transmission member 958 is displaced. A detailed description of the displacement of the transmission member 958 will be given later.

The transmission member 958 is formed in a substantially triangular plate-like body when viewed from the side. The transmission member 958 has a circular shaft hole 958b penetrating in the plate thickness direction, a connecting portion 958a cylindrically protruding in the plate thickness direction from the end on the connecting member 957c side, and a tip portion protruding toward the plate member 951 side. 958c.

The shaft hole 958b is a through hole into which the shaft portion 955b1 (see FIG. 102(a)) is inserted, as described above. Further, the shaft hole 958b is formed such that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 955b1. As a result, the transmission member 958 is rotatably supported by the passage member 955 .

The connecting portion 958a is arranged inside the bent portion of the engaging portion 957c3, as described above. Accordingly, when the connecting member 957c is operated by displacement of the solenoid 957a, the connecting portion 958a contacts the inner edge of the engaging portion 957c3, and the transmission member 958 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 958b.

The distal end portion 958c is inserted into the concave portion 951d1 of the plate member 951 and arranged. Therefore, when the solenoid 957a is operated and the transmission member 958 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 958b, the distal end portion 958c is displaced to push up the engaging portion 951d. Thereby, the plate member 951 can be rotated.

Next, displacement of the plate member 951 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. FIG. Figures 102(a) and 102(b) are sectional views of the specific winning port unit 950 along line CII-CII in Figure 99(c). FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) are perspective front views of the specific winning slot unit 950. FIG.

102(a) and 103(a) show the closed state of the plate member 951, and FIGS. 103(a) and 103(b) show the open state of the plate member 951. As shown in FIG. The closed state of the plate member 951 means that the body portion 951a covers the opening of the body portion 953a of the ball-entering member 953. The open state of the plate member 951 means that the body portion 951a covers the body of the ball-entering member 953. It is in a state separated from the opening of the portion 953a.

As shown in FIGS. 102(a) and 103(a), when power is not applied (supplied) to the body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the biasing force of the coil spring SP2 causes the shaft portion 957a2 to become a plate member. It protrudes toward 951 (left side in FIG. 102(a)). Accordingly, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly arranged on the plate member 951 side away from the body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c, so the connecting portion 958a is pushed out toward the plate member 951 side. As a result, force is transmitted to the distal end portion 958c of the transmission member 958 in the direction of rotation in the gravity direction one side (lower side in FIG. 102(a)) about the shaft hole 958b.

When the tip portion 958c is pushed down to one side in the direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the concave portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the body portion 951a of the plate member 951 approaches the opening 953a1 side of the body portion 953a of the entering ball member 953. is rotated to Thereby, the plate member 951 can be maintained in the closed state.

When the plate member 951 is closed, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the side of the plate member 951 and the surface of the transmission member 958 on the side of the solenoid 957a are brought into contact with each other. As a result, when the player makes an illegal operation and forcibly opens the plate member 951 side, the surface of the connecting member 957c on the side of the plate member 951 is pushed out by the surface of the transmission member 958 on the side of the solenoid 957a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the application of force to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 due to improper operation. As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 102(b) and 103(b), when power is applied (supplied) to the body portion 957a1 of the solenoid 957a, the shaft portion 957a2 is drawn (adsorbed) inside the body portion 957a1. state. Accordingly, the connecting member 957c arranged on the shaft portion 957a2 (annular portion 957a3) is similarly arranged on the main body portion 957a1 side.

In this case, as described above, the connecting portion 958a (see FIG. 101) of the transmission member 958 is arranged inside the engaging portion 957c3 of the connecting member 957c. (right side of FIG. 102(b)). As a result, a force is transmitted to the transmission member 965 in a direction to rotate the distal end portion 958c about the shaft hole 958b toward the other side in the gravitational direction (the upper side in FIG. 102(b)).

When the tip portion 958c is pushed up to the other side in the direction of gravity, the tip portion 958c and the concave portion 951d1 come into contact with each other, and the main body portion 951a of the plate member 951 is separated from the opening side of the main body portion 953a of the ball-entering member 953. is rotated in the direction Thereby, the plate member 951 can be opened.

Further, when the plate member 951 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the weight of the plate member 951 can be used to displace the plate member 951 in the opening direction. It is possible to suppress the force applied to the As a result, damage to the connecting portion 958a or the engaging portion 957c3 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 104, the inner portion of the main body portion 953a of the ball entry member 953 will be described. FIG. 104(a) is a front view of the specific winning opening unit 950, and FIG. 104(b) is a sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 along line CIVb-CIVb of FIG. 104(a). Note that FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is removed, and FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the plate member 951 is attached. 104(a) and 104(b) illustrate the closed state of the plate member 951. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 104, inside the main body portion 953a, there is an inclined surface 954a that inclines to one side in the gravitational direction outward from an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 953a (horizontal direction in FIG. 104(a)). A recessed portion 954b recessed at the end of the inclined surface 954a, a projecting portion 954c projecting from the connecting portion of the inclined surface 954a and the recessed portion 954b, both surfaces in the longitudinal direction and a surface on the side of the passage member 955. 954d of standing installation walls set up in a row are formed.

The inclined surface 954a is a rolling surface of a game ball that rolls a game ball flowing between a pair of inflow ports 953j to the inflow port 953j side, and is formed to be inclined downward toward the inflow port 953j side. . As a result, the game ball that flows into the space facing the inflow port 953j can roll to the inflow port 953j.

The recess 954b is located in front of the inlet 953j (lower in FIG. 104(b)) and is recessed toward one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity). In addition, the concave portion 954b is formed such that the concave tip surface is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j, and receives the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 of the main body portion 953a. can be guided to the recessed portion 955a). Therefore, the game ball entered from the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a can be made to flow into the recessed portion 955a of the passage member 955 in a short period of time. of game balls can be suppressed to suppress over-winning.

Further, the recessed portion 954b extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (vertical direction in FIG. 104(b)). As a result, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 (horizontal direction in FIG. It can be guided (flowed) by time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the concave portion 954b is set such that the width dimension L9 (see FIG. 104(b)) in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball. As a result, when a plurality of game balls are received in the recess 954b, the game balls can be quickly made to flow into the passage member 955 in an aligned state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In addition, the width dimension of the concave portion 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced from the passage member 955 side toward the opening 953a1 side (the plate member 951 side). Thereby, when a game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is received in the concave portion 954b, the game ball can easily flow to the passage member 955 side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The second inclined surface 954e is formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling contact surface 953a2 with the concave portion 954b therebetween, and is inclined downward toward the inlet 953j (passage member 955). formed by As a result, the game ball entered on the side of the second inclined surface 954e rolls in front of the inlet 953j using the downward inclination of the second inclined surface 954e, and rolls quickly toward the passage member 955. can be made As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed by the plate member 951, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The standing wall 954d is formed at a position spaced apart from the second inclined surface 954e by a predetermined distance, and directs the rolling direction of the game ball flowing into the second inclined surface 954e to the inflow port 953j (passage member 955) side. It has two guide surfaces 954d1.

The second guide surface 954d1 is an end surface on the side of the opening 953a1, and is formed to be inclined from the side of the opening 953a1 toward the side of the inlet 953j toward the side of the recess 954b in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. That is, the second guide surface 954d1 is inclined from the opening 953a1 toward the passage member 955 and is formed so as to contact the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 953a2. It is disposed between the passage member 955 and the passage member 955 . As a result, the game ball flowing into the body portion 953a from the longitudinal end portion of the opening 953a1 can be quickly rolled toward the passage member 955. As shown in FIG. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The protruding portions 954c are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the inclined surface 954a and protrude toward the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in the gravitational direction). As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a outward in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 104(b)) of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the recess 954b (passage member 955). . That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (just before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes through the recess 954b from the inclined surface 954a. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short period of time. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from above, and one surface is connected to the surface opposite to the opening 953a1, and one of the remaining two surfaces is connected to the side edge portion 954c3 on the side of the recess 954b. is connected to the side surface of the recessed portion 954b, and the remaining one guide surface 954c1 is an opening 953a1 toward the rolling direction of the game ball of the inclined surface 954a of the game ball (the longitudinal direction outer direction of the rolling surface 953a2) It is formed sloping to the side. Thereby, the rolling speed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be reduced before the recess 954b (passage member 955).

That is, up to the recess 954b, the rolling speed of the game ball in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is increased, and the rolling in the longitudinal direction of the game ball is decelerated before (just before) the recess 954b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from rolling from the inclined surface 954a to the second inclined surface 954e through the concave portion 954b. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short period of time. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, as described above, the rotation axis of the plate member 951 is formed between both ends in the width direction of the opening 953a1 of the main body portion 953a. An end portion of the plate member 951 can be located on the one end (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the rolling surface 953a2. As a result, when the plate member 951 is in the open state, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has flowed into the main body portion 951a from jumping out from the opening 953a1 side of the main body portion 951a.

Furthermore, since the game ball guided to the opening 953a1 side by the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the plate member 951, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 is reduced. can be decelerated before the recess 954b (passage member 955). That is, while increasing the rolling speed of the game ball up to the recess 954b, the rolling of the game ball is decelerated in front of (just before) the recess 954b, and the game ball passes through the recess 954b from the inclined surface 954a. Rolling up to the second inclined surface 954e can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball can flow into the passage member 955 in a short period of time. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Further, the guide surface 954c1 is formed in a downwardly inclined shape from the connection portion between the side edge portion 954c3 and the inlet 953j toward the side portion 954c2 of the connection portion with the inclined surface 954a. Thereby, while suppressing the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 from jumping out from the opening 953a1, the game ball can be made to flow into the inlet 953j (passage member 955) in a short time. can be done.

That is, of the game balls that roll along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 with the inclined surface 954a facing the passage member 955, the game ball with a relatively low (slow) rolling speed has an opening 933a1. Since there is a low possibility that the second inclined surface 954e will roll from the inclined surface 954a through the recessed portion 954b, the second inclined surface 954e is suppressed by contacting the guide surface 954c1 and guiding it toward the opening 953a1. Therefore, it can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short time. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided over the guide surface 954c1 to the standing wall 954d formed on the side of the second inclined surface 954e. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by riding over the guide surface 954c1 and colliding with the erected wall 954d, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 954a in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 can be quickly made to flow into the inlet 953j (passage member 955) while preventing it from jumping out of the opening 953a1. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A side edge portion 954c3 of the projecting portion 954c on the end surface opposite to the standing wall 954d extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The standing wall 954d has a second side edge portion 954d2 on the end surface opposite to the projecting portion 954c extending in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2. The side edge portion 954c3 has a length dimension L30 (see FIG. 104(b)) in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2, which is substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface 953a2 of the second side edge portion 954d2. It is set smaller than the length dimension L31 in the direction to As a result, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge 954d2 of the erected wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated and easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member 955. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Furthermore, the standing wall 954d is set such that the distance L32 (see FIG. 104(a)) between the intermediate position in the thickness direction and the second inclined surface 954e is substantially the same as the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has climbed over the guide surface 954c1 can be brought into contact with the second side edge portion 954d2 of the standing wall 954d, and can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A protruding portion 954c is positioned on the extension of the inclination direction of the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d, and the game ball guided toward the concave portion 954b (passage member 955) by the second guide surface 954d1 rolls. Even if the moving speed is relatively high (low), the game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 954c and decelerated. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short period of time. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The projecting portion 954c is set such that the distance dimension L33 (see FIG. 104(a)) from the recessed surface of the recessed portion 954b to the projecting tip is set larger than the radius of the game ball. In addition, as described above, the protruding portion 954c is formed continuously with the side surface of the recessed portion 954b, so that the game ball guided toward the passage member 955 by the second guide surface 954d1 of the standing wall 954d rolls. Even when the speed is relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily come into contact with the projecting portion 954c. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated, and can be made to flow into the passage member 955 in a short period of time. As a result, by the plate member 951, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening 953a1 is closed, thereby suppressing over-winning.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, the assembled state of the specific winning hole unit 950 and the drive unit 960 will be described. 105(a) is a top view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960, and FIG. 105(b) is a side view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the driving unit 960. FIG. FIG. 106(a) is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 along line CVIa-CVIa in FIG. 105(a), and FIG. 106(b) is line CVIb-CVIb in FIG. 106(a). is a cross-sectional view of the specific winning opening unit 950 and the drive unit 960 in FIG.

In FIGS. 105(a) and 105(b), the wiring HS1 connected to the solenoid 957a that operates the plate member 951 and the solenoid 610 that operates the pair of blade members (see FIG. 83(a)). A part of the wiring HS2 is shown. Also, in FIG. 106(b), part of the wiring HS3 connected to the detection device SE1 for detecting the number of game balls that have flowed into the specific winning hole 65a is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the driving unit 960 for driving the feather members 945 (see FIG. 83(a)) of the winning opening unit 930 is located at a position where it partially overlaps the specific winning opening unit 950 when viewed from the front. formed in Thus, a space can be formed on the opposite side (back side) of the second winning hole 140 (pair of feather members 945) from the game area.

Here, conventionally, the second winning opening 140, the pair of feather members 945 for opening or closing the second winning opening 140, the first driving means for driving the pair of feather members 945, and the specific winning opening 65a , a game machine comprising a plate member 951 for opening or closing the specific prize winning port 65a, and a second driving means for driving the plate member 951 is known. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 and the plate member 951, respectively. There was a problem that it was difficult to dispose other members and devices on the back side of the member 951, and it was difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 951, it is possible to form a space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945. Yes (see Figure 97). That is, the drive unit 960 for driving the pair of feather members and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are concentrated on the back side of the plate member 951 (the specific winning opening 65a), thereby arranging other members and devices. A space for this can be secured on the back surface of the pair of feather members 945 (second winning opening 140), and the space can be effectively utilized accordingly.

Further, the operation means (drive unit 960) of the blade member 945 arranged near the central opening (where the center frame 86 is arranged) formed in the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82) is moved away from the central opening. By arranging it on the back side of the plate member 951 (specific winning port unit 950) arranged on the base plate, the movable body of the operation unit that is visible to the player through the inside of the central opening (center frame 86) It can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player by retreating to the back side of 60 (opposite side to the game area).

That is, the movable body of the action unit is arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 when it is normally (retracted) so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, and when it is movable (extends) it is located in the central opening (center frame 86) of the base plate 60. ), the operating means (driving unit 960) of the feather member 945 disposed near the central opening is positioned at a specific winning opening located far from the central opening. By arranging it at a position overlapping the unit 950 in the horizontal direction, it is possible to easily arrange the movable body at a position away from the central opening at the time of retraction. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body of the action unit during normal (retraction). As a result, when the movable body is moved to the protruding state, it is possible to easily give interest to the player.

Further, the plate member 951 is set to have a projected area larger than that of the pair of feather members 945 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the dead space behind the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized. That is, in the game board 13 provided with two displacement members (the plate member 951 and the pair of feather members 945), respective drive means (the drive unit 957 and the Since the drive unit 960) is arranged, each drive means can be easily arranged on the back surface of one displacement member (plate member 951), and the other displacement member (pair of feather members 945) can be easily arranged on the back surface side. Space can be formed.

Furthermore, the plate member 951 has a projected area larger than that of the driving unit 960 that drives the pair of blade members 945 and the driving unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 . The dead space behind the winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105(a), the drive unit 960 that drives the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the plate member 951 (horizontal direction in FIG. 105(a)). are arranged side by side. Therefore, the dead space behind the specific winning opening 65a (plate member 951) can be effectively utilized.

In this case, as described above, the plate member 951 (specific prize winning unit 950) is disposed at a position spaced further than the pair of feather members 945 from the central opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. A01). The longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the separating direction. Thereby, the space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 can be easily secured. As a result, the space on the back side of the pair of feather members 945 can be effectively utilized.

As described above, the rolling portion 943a is formed on the front base 943 of the front unit 940, the rolling portion 943a is disposed through the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941, and the drive unit 960 is formed on the rear base. Since it is connected to 941 , the drive unit 960 can be held (arranged) on the front base 943 at the same time as the operation of fastening and fixing the rear base 941 to the front base 943 . Thus, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the drive unit 960 when attaching the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (game board 13).

The solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are set at substantially the same position on the side opposite to the plate member 951 side (rear side) of the specific winning hole unit 950, and the drive unit Wiring HS1 and wiring HS2 connected to the solenoid 957a of 957 and the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 are connected from the end of the specific winning port unit 950 opposite to the plate member 951 side (back side). Accordingly, wiring of the solenoid 957a and the solenoid 610 can be easily organized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wires from coming apart on the opposite side (rear side) of the game board 13 from the game area, and to prevent the wires HS1 and HS2 from interfering with other devices and accessories.

That is, the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960 that drives the blade member 945 and the solenoid 957a of the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged in a posture in which the axial directions of the shaft portions 961b and 957a2 are oriented in the same direction. At the same time, the wiring HS1 and the wiring HS2 are connected (pulled out) to the opposite side of the main body portion 961a and the shaft portion 957a2 from the shaft portions 961b and 957a2. Accordingly, the wiring HS1 of the driving unit 960 and the wiring HS2 of the driving unit 957 can be easily put together.

The drive unit 960 that drives the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 that drives the plate member 951 are arranged at positions where both side surfaces in the direction of gravity are substantially flush. This makes it possible to simplify the shape of a partitioning member (not shown) that partitions the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 and restricts the electromagnetic field from flowing in the area where the drive unit 957 and the drive unit 960 are arranged.

That is, the sides of the main body portion 961a of the driving unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the driving unit 957 are formed to have different sizes, or the main body portion 961a of the driving unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the driving unit 957 are formed on both sides in the direction of gravity. If the surfaces are arranged at different positions in the gravitational direction, both side surfaces in the gravitational direction of the main body portion 961a of the drive unit 960 and the main body portion 957a1 of the drive unit 957 form a step. It becomes necessary to form a member, and the shape of such a partition member becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 are arranged at a position where both side surfaces of the main body portion 961a and the main body portion 957a1 in the gravitational direction are substantially flush with each other, and a step is formed between the outer surfaces. Therefore, the partition member can be made flat. As a result, the shape of the partition member can be simplified.

The partitioning member is a conductive barrier for partitioning the arrangement area of the drive unit 960 and the drive unit 957 from other areas and restricting the flow of electromagnetic waves between these areas. It is formed from a metal plate.

In addition, the transmission member 965 is disposed between the passage member 955 of the specific winning port unit 950 and the rolling portion 943a of the front unit 940 (see FIG. 97), and the transmission member 965 Since the displacement member 966 for opening and closing the pair of blade members 945 by sliding displacement with the rotation of is arranged, compared with the conventional product in which the pair of blade members 945 are opened and closed only by rotating members, the second prize A space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the rolling part 943a on the back side of the port 140. - 特許庁In addition, in order to avoid interference with the rotating member as in the conventional product, there is no need to bend the ball throwing path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning opening 140 toward the specific winning opening unit 950 side. The winning opening 140 can be brought close to the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), the drive unit 960 is arranged at a position overlapping with the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE2 arranged in a pair in the specific winning opening unit 950 in a front view. is set. That is, the detection device SE2 is arranged between the plate member 951 and the drive unit 960. As shown in FIG. As a result, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with through the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be hidden by the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE1, so that such tampering can be performed. can be made difficult.

Here, as described above, when the driving means (driving unit 960) for driving the feather member 945 is arranged on the back side of the specific winning hole unit 950, a piano wire or the like is inserted from the gap of the pachinko machine 10. If a hole penetrating from the game area side to the drive unit 960 is formed in the ball entry member 953 with a drill or the like for the purpose of illegally operating the gaming machine by doing so, it is difficult for the clerk to discover the illegality. there was a risk of being

That is, since the plate member 951 is arranged on the game area (player) side of the ball entering member 953, the ball entering member 953 is hidden by the plate member 951, and the fraudulent use of the ball entering member 953 is prevented by the clerk. is difficult to find.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to secure the path from the specific winning opening 65a to the first driving means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling or the like, detection is performed. Since the detection board SE1b of the device SE1 can be destroyed, by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with through the specific winning opening 65a, the drive unit 960 can be prevented from opening the plate member 951 by closing the plate member 951. It is particularly effective to detect fraud by monitoring the state of the detection device SE1, because the area where the fraud has been committed is invisible.

In addition, since the detecting device SE1 is the same diversion product (ready-made product) as the detecting devices for detecting other game balls (for example, the detecting device SE2 and the detecting device SE3), the degree of freedom in the size of the outer shape is ensured. Can not. Therefore, a gap is formed between the facing detection devices SE1. Therefore, if the player drills the ball-entering member 953 with a drill or the like aiming at the gap, there is a possibility that the clerk cannot be notified of the player's cheating.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the wiring HS3 is connected to the opposing sides of the pair of detection devices SE1. Thereby, the wiring HS3 can be arranged in the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. Therefore, when the player penetrates the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 with a drill or the like, the wiring HS3 can be broken by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the clerk to discover the fraud by informing the error.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the specific prize winning opening 65a to the drive unit, for example, if a tool such as a drill is used to make a hole, the wiring HS3 may be damaged (disconnected) due to the fraudulent act. ). Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to commit fraud without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, thereby making it easier to deter fraudulent activity.

An annular protrusion 953c into which a screw for fastening the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955 is screwed is formed between the pair of detecting devices SE1. As a result, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side (the lower side of E10(a)) of the ball entry member 953, the screw engaged with the annular protrusion 953c will cause the drive unit to be tampered with. 960 can be hidden, making such fraud more difficult. That is, as described above, it is difficult to shield the front surface of the drive unit 960 with the pair of detection devices SE1, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection devices SE1. , the unshielded area in front of the drive unit 960 can be compensated for by the screws, making fraud more difficult.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular projection 953c of the entering ball member 953. As shown in FIG. This allows the wiring HS3 to be routed (positioned) over a wider range of the gap formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other. That is, a wider area in front of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by the wiring HS3. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with from the open side of the ball-entering member 953, such tampering can be made more difficult. Alternatively, it is possible to easily recognize that it is difficult to commit fraudulent acts without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring HS3, and it is possible to easily deter fraudulent acts.

Therefore, when the player penetrates the gap between the pair of detection devices SE1 with a drill or the like, the wire HS3 can be easily broken by the drill. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to recognize the detection failure, so that the pachinko machine 10 can make it easier for the clerk to discover the fraud by informing the error.

Further, the wiring HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c. As a result, force in the shearing direction is less likely to act on the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS. That is, when the wiring HS3 is not wound around the annular protrusion 953c and is discharged outside the specific winning opening unit 950, the wiring HS3 is pulled by the specific winning opening unit 950 in the discharging direction, thereby detecting the wiring HS3. A shearing force acts on the connecting portion between the device SE1 and the wiring HS. Since the connecting portion between the detection device SE1 and the wiring HS3 is formed by an insertion type connector, it is easily cut by force in the shearing direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the wire HS3 is wound around the annular protrusion 953c, so that when the wire HS3 is pulled in the discharge direction of the specific winning hole unit 950, the connecting portion with the detection device SE1 can act in the direction in which the wiring HS3 is connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring HS3 from being cut at the connecting portion with the detection device SE1.

Also, the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is formed at a position biased toward the end of the wire HS3 of the detection device SE1 on the side opposite to the discharge side. Therefore, since the wiring HS3 of the pair of detection devices SE1 is pulled out to the opposite side of the screw engagement position (annular projection 953c), the wiring HS3 is routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the drive unit 960. be able to. That is, a wider area of the front surface of the drive unit 960 can be shielded by screws and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the plate member 951 is opened and the drive unit 960 is tampered with through the specific winning opening 65a, such tampering can be made more difficult.

Next, the overall configuration of the ball throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG. 107(a) is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 107(b) is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG. 108(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the ball-throwing unit 970 includes a distribution unit 980 provided on the player side (game area side) and having a space in which game balls can be inserted, and a game area of the distribution unit 980. and a passage unit 990 arranged on the opposite side.

The sorting unit 980 includes openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) connected to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 of the winning port unit 930 described above. ) through the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 to the opposite side of the game area. A detailed description of the sorting unit 980 will be given later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on the other end side of the sorting unit 980 in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction). The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first insertion hole 991a to second insertion hole 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and the game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 are received through the openings. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112, the configuration of distribution unit 980 will be described in detail. 109(a) is a front view of the sorting unit 980, and FIG. 109(b) is a side view of the sorting unit 980. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 980, and FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 980. FIG. 112(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 along line CXIIa-CXIIa in FIG. 109(a), and FIG. 112(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). is.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, the sorting unit 980 rotates between a rear base 985, a front base 981 arranged on the player side of the rear base 985, and the front base 981 and the rear base. It mainly includes a distribution part 983 arranged in a possible state, and a cover member 987 arranged at a position corresponding to the distribution part 983 on the rear side of the rear base 985 .

The rear base 985 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and includes a plate-shaped base portion 985a and a plurality of openings (openings) passing through the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recessed portion 985h recessed on the other side of the plurality of openings in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity), and a housing portion 986b and a projecting portion 986e projecting from the opposite surface of the recessed portion 985h. formed with.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d circularly penetrating the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole into which a screw inserted through the front base 981, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole into which a screw for inserting a passage unit 990, which will be described later, is screwed. Thereby, the rear base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping part of the openings 985b to 985f, which will be described later, on the other side in the gravitational direction. Also, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. As a result, it is possible to guide the downward direction of the game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity to the side of the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, the game balls can be easily made to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recessed portion 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109(b)) and is formed substantially in the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109(b)). be done. Further, the recessed portion 985h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating a part of the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, inside, and has a bearing portion 985j projecting annularly from the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the short direction, and the inner edge dimension is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) slopes downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed substantially in the center of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 109(b)), and is positioned substantially at the same position in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 109(b)) as the openings 985b and 985c. position. Similarly to the openings 985b and 985c, the opening 985d is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) slopes downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Thereby, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

An opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and an opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. In addition, the openings 985e and 985f are formed into space inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 that open on the front base 981 side, and space discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 that open on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. Intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 communicating with the passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are mainly formed.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are sized to allow passage of game balls. be. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed to extend in the direction of gravity, and the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in the direction of gravity) communicates with the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1, and are formed to have a size through which game balls can pass. . Thereby, game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 can be caused to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.

Further, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed with recessed portions 985f4 that are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball (gravitational direction). The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for arranging a detection device SE3, which will be described later, inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set to have substantially the same external shape as the detection device SE3 when viewed from the rear. As a result, the detection device SE3 can be installed by inserting it from the rear side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extending direction of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 substantially coincide. placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side (upper side in the direction of gravity) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 to the one side (lower side in the direction of gravity), it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. can. Thereby, game balls passing through the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 can be detected.

In addition, since the detecting device SE3 is formed such that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the dead weight of the game ball can be easily used when throwing the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a. Since the detailed configuration of the detection device SE3 is the same as that of the detection device SE1 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The recessed portions 985e4 and 985f4 are formed so as to be continuous with the spaces of the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed using the detection device SE3. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 from increasing in the gravitational direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rear base 985 from increasing in size in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) and are formed to have a size through which game balls can pass. Further, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 can flow into the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 and can be passed through the space to be thrown to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction). Similarly to the opening 985d, the opening 985g is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) slopes downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can roll to the side opposite to the front base 981 .

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are sized to allow passage of game balls. be. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be made to flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The housing portion 986b is formed from a pair of semi-annular rings. Further, the accommodation portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b, which will be described later, inside, and its inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b that is formed in the cylindrical body. In addition, the projection dimension of the accommodation portion 986b is set larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. Thereby, the magnetic body 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. In addition, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed of a pair of semi-annular bodies, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is slightly increased due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semi-annular bodies can be elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be provided.

The protruding portion 986e protrudes in a cylindrical shape from a position on the opposite side of the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a. In addition, the projecting portion 986e has a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape in its axis. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw that passes through the cover member 987 described later is screwed. By screwing the screw while the cover member 987 is in contact, the cover member 987 is fastened to the rear base 985. can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and can generate a magnetic field toward the front base 981 via the base portion 985a by being arranged in the housing portion 986b. As a result, a magnetic body 988c arranged in the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, is repelled, and the distributing portion 983 can be easily displaced.

The front base 981 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. The front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 when viewed from the front. It is mainly formed with an exit portion 982 .

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 981f and a second guide wall 981d, a second insertion hole 981e penetrating near the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate It mainly includes a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) that fastens the ball feeding unit 970 in the assembled state to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 82). .

The first guide walls 981f are formed in a semicircular annular shape, and are formed in a pair in the lateral direction with a bulging portion 982 (to be described later) sandwiched therebetween. In addition, the first guide wall 981f is formed with a semicircular open portion facing substantially the center in the width direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed below the bulging portion 982, which will be described later, in the gravitational direction, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d are formed so that the inner edge shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, the walls around the fastening holes 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d. A guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are assembled. Thus, the front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be fastened.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball. Also, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected along the edge portion on the side opposite to the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 109(a)). Also, the through hole 981c is a portion that communicates with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above. It is formed at a position overlapping the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into.

The side wall portion 981b is formed in such a size that the upright front end surface contacts the second ball throwing portion 942c of the winning hole unit 930 when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60 . In addition, the side wall portion 981b has a rolling surface 981c1 on the other end side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) located closer to the other end side in the gravity direction than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a. It is formed with a downward slope toward the side.

Further, the side wall portion 981b has a projection 981b1 projecting from the upright tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position radially separated from the game ball in the gravity direction from the rolling surface 981c1. As a result, when a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be given later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows game balls to pass through the inside thereof, and the game balls flowing in from the inflow port 982d pass through the inside thereof. and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching from the ball throwing passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is bent and erected toward the back base 985 at a position approximately in the middle of an inlet 982d formed by cutting the upper end in the direction of gravity. and concave portions 982e to 982j provided at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inflow port 982d is cut out in a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the inlet 982d has an inner edge portion aligned with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 when the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. formed at overlapping positions.

In addition, the inlet 982d has a second protrusion 982d1 that protrudes in the opposite direction to the rear base 985 at the edge on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning hole unit 930 described above. The second protrusion 982d1 abuts against the inner edge of the recessed portion 942g1.

Also, the distance dimension L34 (see FIG. 109(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end surface of the inlet 982d on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is It is set larger than the distance L35 (see FIG. 87(b)) to the inner edge of the portion 942g on one side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the game ball thrown to the first ball-throwing portion 942g through the first winning port 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 982) and the first ball-throwing portion 942g It is difficult to get caught between them.

The standing wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance when viewed from the front. The standing wall 982a is formed on the lower side of the inlet 982d in the gravitational direction and includes a contact portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape when viewed in the standing direction on the upper side in the gravitational direction.

The standing wall 982a is set so that the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 and the horizontal distance L36 (see FIG. 112(b)) are set larger than the diameter of the game ball. A first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed which are spaces through which the .

The first path TR1 and the second path TR2 are formed on the downstream side of a sorting section 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the sorting section 983 is thrown to one of them. The sorting unit 983 is set to alternately throw game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of game balls flowing into the first winning hole 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

A bearing portion 982c that annularly protrudes from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the rear base 985 is formed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the standing wall 982a. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter set substantially equal to the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the rear base 985. Therefore, when combining the front base 981 and the rear base 985, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. The shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 by inserting the shaft member 988a and inserting the other end side of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c.

The abutment portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distributing portion 983, which will be described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the distributing portion 983 is regulated by the action portion 983a of the distributing portion 983 coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be given later.

The recessed portion 982e and the recessed portion 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction). Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2, which is a space that communicates with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch path BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first path TR1, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985b of the rear base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch path BK2 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the second path TR2, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985c of the rear base 985.

The recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravitational direction (lower side in the gravitational direction) in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 extend to one side in the gravity direction by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 allows the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d to flow into the opening 985e of the rear base 985. As shown in FIG.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 allows the game balls that have flowed into the inflow port 982d to flow into the opening 985e of the rear base 985. As shown in FIG.

The recessed portion 982g is formed between the recessed portion 982h and the recessed portion 982j, and the recessed direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. A third branch passage BK3, which is a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, is formed inside the recess 982g. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the size reduction of the sorting unit 980 can be achieved. .

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage is formed so as to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage or the second passage, and allows the received game balls to flow into the opening 985 d of the rear base 985 .

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side of the bulging portion 982 in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) and extends toward the one side in the direction of gravity while being inclined toward the rear base 985 side. Also, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from the opening 985b in a state in which the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first path TR1, the second path TR2, the first branch path BK1, the second branch path BK2 and the third branch path BK3 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b, thereby causing the game ball to flow down. can be guided to the side of the openings 985b to 985f to facilitate the flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 and the guide portion 982j1 are connected to the recessed portions 982h and 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the standing tip surfaces thereof descend toward the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 109(b)). tilted. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 are brought into contact with the guide portions 982h1, 982j1, and the standing tip surfaces of the guide portions 982j1, and are guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, It is possible to make it easier to flow into the openings 985e and 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and guided toward the rear base 985 while being collided with the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1, thereby causing the game ball to collide with the opening 985e. and the opening 985f. Furthermore, since the standing distance of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced by the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be increased to improve durability.

Here, as described above, the sorting unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is made visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the first path TR1 and the second path TR2 are difficult to be visually recognized from the player's side because they pass through the front unit 940 . Further, when the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are erected on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the thickness of the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 causes game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to play. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for a person to visually recognize.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guiding portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed so as to be connected to the inclined portion 982b, so that the standing dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the game balls thrown to the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) easier to see even when the front unit 940 is interposed. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be positioned closer to the back base 985 as the game ball flows down, thereby ensuring rigidity and guiding the game ball. Since the thickness in the front-rear direction of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution part 983 is set to have a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the sorting portion 983 penetrates through an acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, an intermediate plate 983b projecting from approximately the center position of the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and a connection portion between the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. a through hole 983c, a contact portion 983d that bulges in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and a wall portion 983e formed by connecting the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the rear base 985 side. and are formed mainly.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to have a slightly larger outer diameter than the shaft member 988a. As a result, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are assembled, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the through hole 983c of the distribution section 983, the front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be assembled while the distribution section 983 is rotatable. 985.

The intermediate plate 983b extends outward in the radial direction of the through-hole 983c, and in a state in which the displacement of the distributing portion 983 is restricted by rotating in one direction or the other, the intermediate plate 983b extends from its tip end. The spaced distance L37 (see FIG. 112(b)) to the inside is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one or the other of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, the intermediate plate 983b rotates the distributing portion 983 about the through hole 983c, thereby restricting the throwing of game balls to one side of the first passage TR1 to the other side of the second passage TR2. can be switched to a regulated state.

The acting portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b when viewed from the front. In addition, the connecting position of the action portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the connecting position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution section 983 through the inflow port 982d is put in a state where the load is applied to the action section 983a. As a result, the distribution part 983 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed so as to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the through hole 983c, and has a thickness larger than that of the concave portion 985h of the rear base 985 described above. set small. Therefore, in a state where the distribution part 983 is arranged between the rear base 985 and the front base 981 facing each other, the wall part 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown into the sorting unit 980 from the inflow port 982d from being caught in the concave portion 985h, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down.

In addition, the wall portion 983e includes a housing portion 983e1 recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b on the rear side of the intermediate plate 983b and at the radially outer end portion from the through hole 983c. The accommodation portion 983e1 is a portion that accommodates the magnetic body 988c formed in a columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the rear base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated inside from the rear base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is made of a magnet and arranged in a state of repulsion with the magnetic body 988b arranged on the rear base 985 . As a result, the distributing portion 983 receives a magnetic force from the magnetic body 988b arranged on the rear base 985, rotates about the through hole 983c, and rotates the extending direction of the acting portion 983a to one side or the other side. can be tilted to

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are disposed in a repulsive state and the housing portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 can be prevented from escaping from That is, since a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distributing portion 983 can be simplified, and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c to the distributing portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic forces of the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c are set to magnetic attraction forces smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic bodies 988b and 988c and stagnating inside the distribution unit 980 .

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is arranged on the opposite side of the recess 985h of the rear base 985 from the front base 981 side. In addition, the cover member 987 is formed with two first recessed portions 987a and a second recessed portion 987b that are recessed in the direction of gravity in a circular shape when viewed from the front.

The first recessed portion 987a is a portion that accommodates the accommodation portion 986b of the rear base 985 described above inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the accommodation portion 986b. Therefore, in a state where the magnetic body 988b is accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b as described above, the tip of the accommodation portion 986b is accommodated in the first concave portion 987a, so that the magnetic substance 988b accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b is accommodated. It is possible to suppress slipping out of the portion 986b.

The second recess 987b has a through hole 987b1 for fastening and fixing to the rear base 985 on the bottom of the recess. Further, the inner shape of the recessed portion of the second recessed portion 987b is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the projecting portion 986e of the rear base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can be positioned by accommodating the second recessed portion 987b in the projecting portion 986e of the rear base 985, and in the positioned state, the screw can be inserted into the fastening hole of the projecting portion 986e through the through hole 987b1. can be concluded.

Next, referring to FIG. 113, the operation of the sorting section 983 when game balls flow into the sorting unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 113(a) and 113(b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the sorting unit 980 in the range CXIII of FIG. 112(b). In the following description, the acting portion 983a of the distribution portion 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one side of the first path TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other side of the second path TR2. Only the case will be described, and a description of the case of restricting the throwing of a game ball to one side of the first path TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of a game ball to the other side of the second path TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 113(a) and 113(b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution portion 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action portion 983a), as described above, it is distributed to the distribution portion 983. The provided magnetic body 988c repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 110), so that the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is inclined toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is regulated by contacting the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 with the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side (see FIG. 113(a)).

When the game ball is thrown to the sorting section 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action section 983a on the side of the first passage TR1. As described above, the connecting position of the action portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to the other end side (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the connecting position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. , the load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 983a on the side of the first passage TR1.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 113(b), the sorting portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the through hole 983c is inclined toward the first passage TR1. It is said that The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the side of the first passage TR1 coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. As shown in FIG. Also, in this case, the repelling direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from a state in which the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side of the through hole 983c acts toward the second passage TR2 to a state in which it acts toward the first passage TR1.

Therefore, the distribution part 983 can be rotationally displaced around the through hole 983c using the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Moreover, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution part 983 can be maintained. Therefore, each time a game ball is thrown, the sorting section 983 displaces the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b to throw the game ball one by one to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG. 114(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 114(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective front view of the passageway unit 990, and FIG. 116 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passageway unit 990. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the sorting unit 980 side, and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a game ball that passes through, a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992, Detecting device SE4 arranged between three passage members 993 is mainly provided.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. In addition, the first passage member 991 includes a first insertion hole 991a formed through the sorting unit 980 on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity), and one side of the first insertion hole 991a in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). side), a third through hole 991c and a fourth through hole 991d formed on both sides of the second through hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and an outer periphery in a front view. A plurality of circular through-holes 991f are formed through the through-holes 991f.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. In addition, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is screwed is formed in the first insertion hole 991a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

In addition, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 continues when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside (first passage TR1) of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c is provided with recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have approximately the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the concave portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside while the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Furthermore, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the concave portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990. and the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to prevent a part of the detection device SE3 from protruding outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c has a projecting portion 991c2 projecting from the second insertion hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is horizontally adjacent. It is inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and roll in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (leftward in FIG. 114(a)).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985b of the distribution unit 980 continues when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside (second passage TR2) of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that accommodates the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and is formed to have approximately the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside while the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d has a projecting portion 991c2 projecting from the second insertion hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is horizontal. is inclined downward in a direction away from the adjacent second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2 and roll in the direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (rightward in FIG. 114(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 922 penetrating to the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and the fifth insertion hole. It mainly includes a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating to one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of 922 in the gravitational direction, and a standing wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 922 .

The fifth insertion hole 922 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the fifth insertion hole 991e is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 continues when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991 a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 922 .

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge portion of the fifth insertion hole 922 toward the third passage member 993 side. The standing wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball sent to the fifth insertion hole 922 can roll toward the third passage member 993 (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

An engaging portion 992d that protrudes horizontally and a protruding wall 992e that protrudes horizontally from the end on the first passage member 991 side are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the standing wall 992a. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L shape that protrudes in the horizontal direction and whose tip is bent toward the third passage member 993 side. In the engagement portion 992d, wirings of the detection device SE4 and the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980 are inserted between the engagement portion 992d and the standing wall 992a. As a result, the wires of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 .

The protruding wall 992e is formed to protrude in a semicircular shape in a front view from both sides of the standing wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and has a through hole 992e1 passing through the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 It is positioned coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. Accordingly, by inserting a screw through the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof communicates with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. be. Thereby, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

A guide wall 992c1 standing toward the third passage member 993 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to a first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) and an end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction. and a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces for positioning the detection device SE4. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions on the opposite side of the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

The second passage member 992 also has an annular projection 992f projecting toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 114(a)) from the sixth insertion hole 992c. The annular protrusion 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. In addition, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

Furthermore, an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 is screwed is formed in the first insertion hole 991a so as to be connected to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passing through the opening 985g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

In addition, the second insertion hole 991b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. Thereby, the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled toward the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a penetrating substantially in the middle position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge on the other side in the direction of gravity. Mainly comprising an upright wall 993e erected from the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d projecting in the longitudinal direction, and a recessed portion 993c recessed in the side surface of the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Also, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position that communicates with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. Thereby, the game ball passing through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions except for the gravity direction other side (gravitational direction upper side) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. In addition, the guide wall 993b is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 (inclined downward toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992). be done. As a result, the game ball sent to the seventh insertion hole 992g can roll to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 (the right side in FIG. 114(b)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 114(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side of the standing wall 992a of the second passage member 992 in the gravitational direction (lower side in FIG. 114(b)). As described above, the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 114(b)), so that the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the standing wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the sorting unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the sizes of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the direction of gravity can be reduced.

When the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the upright wall 993e has a distance dimension between the opposing first wall portion 992c2 of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the short side distance dimension in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the SE1a. Accordingly, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the gravitational direction.

In addition, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is formed on the upstream side (the side of the second passage member 992) where game balls are thrown. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing fraud by the player. In this embodiment, the first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is located on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Since it is formed, it is possible to suppress positional deviation of the height of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface. As a result, it is possible to easily insert the game ball that is inserted through the sixth insertion hole 992c through the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and has a bent portion 993d1 bent toward the second passage member 992 at the projecting tip. In the state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the bent portion 993d1 has a distance dimension between the facing second wall portion 992c3 of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the long side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of . This makes it possible to position the detection device SE4 in the horizontal direction.

The recessed portion 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and has an outer diameter of the annular projection 992f. It is formed with an inner edge shape that is larger than the Further, the recessed portion 993c has a through hole 993c1 which is formed through the bottom surface of the recessed portion coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular projection 992f. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the concave portion 993c, and a screw is inserted through the through hole 993c1 from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1, whereby the second passage is closed. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball-throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the ball-throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first prize-winning port 64 and the second prize-winning port 140, and the first prize-winning port 64 and the second prize-winning port 140 Since it is arranged on the back side of the front unit 940 (opposite side of the game area), by replacing the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and arranging another unit, Another game form is possible without affecting the flow of the ball.

Another unit (replacement unit 1980) of the sorting unit 980 will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117(a) is a front view of the replaceable unit 1980, and FIG. 117(b) is a rear view of the replaceable unit 1980. FIG. 118(a) is a cross-sectional view of the replacement unit 1980 along line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 117(a), and FIG. 118(b) is a cross-section of replacement unit 1980 along line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. 118(a). It is a diagram. The same parts as those of the distribution unit 980 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the replacement unit 1980 mainly includes a front base 1981 arranged on the game area side and a rear base 1985 arranged on the opposite side of the front base 1981 to the game area side. formed in preparation for

The front base 1981 is formed from a colored translucent resin material. Also, the front base 1981 is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 when viewed from the front. The front base 1981 mainly includes a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 1982 that bulges from the base plate 981a toward the player (the side opposite to the rear base 1985).

Also, the front base 1981 is made of a material whose color is different from the color of the front base 981 of the distribution unit 980 (yellow in this embodiment). As a result, the player can easily recognize whether the game board 13 is provided with the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 .

In other words, when the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with specifications on which the sorting unit 980 is arranged and the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) with specifications on which the exchange unit 1980 is arranged are introduced into the same store. As will be described later, since the shape of the game area (the front surface of the game board 13) is the same for both specifications, it is difficult for the player to determine which specification is used. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which specification the game board 13 (pachinko machine 10) has.

The base plate 1981a is set to have substantially the same outer shape as the base plate 981a of the sorting unit 980 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when the sorting unit 980 is replaced with the replacement unit 1980 (the specification is changed), the front base 1981 (the replacement unit 1980) is arranged on the base plate 60 without changing the shape of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60. can be set. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the shape of the base plate 60 in accordance with the specification change due to the replacement of the distribution unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 1981a, and is set to a size such that a game ball can be inserted therein. The bulging portion 1982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with an inlet 982d formed by notching the upper end portion in the direction of gravity.

The width dimension in the horizontal direction of the bulging portion 1982 is set to a size that allows only one game ball to pass through, and the game ball that has flowed in from the inflow port 982d can pass through the inner side and flow down. . In addition, the inner surface of the bulging portion 1982 on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) is set at substantially the same position in the direction of gravity as the inner surface of the opening 985d formed in the rear base 1985 on the one side in the direction of gravity. As a result, game balls that have flowed into the exchange unit 1980 from the inlet 982d can be thrown to the opening 985d in the order in which they flow into the inlet 982d.

The rear base 1985 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the rear base 985 of the sorting unit 980 when viewed from the front, and communicates with the inner space of the opening 985d communicating with the inner space of the bulging portion 1982 and the through hole 981c. opening 985g.

According to the replacement unit 1980 configured as described above, the outer shape of the base plate 1981a when viewed from the front is substantially the same as the base plate 981a of the distribution unit 980, as described above. exchange (change of specifications) can be easily performed.

Here, a game comprising a ball-entering unit provided with a ball-entering opening formed so that a game ball can enter and a passage connected to the ball-entering opening, and a game board on which the ball-entering unit is arranged machine is known. According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball-entering unit with another ball-entering unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting (combining) the game board. can. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the ball-entering unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance in front of the game board. Therefore, when using a ball-entering unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the sorting unit 980 (entering ball unit) has an inflow port 982d and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 connected to the inflow port 982d. A prize winning port unit 930 arranged on the front side, and a prize winning port unit 930 disposed on the back side of the prize winning port unit 930 via the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 and connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Since the passage unit 990 is provided, it is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the prize-winning unit 930 on the front surface of the game board 13, and a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages is secured on the front surface of the game board. No need. Therefore, by replacing the sorting unit 980 with the replacement unit 1980, the game board 13 (the base plate 60 and the front unit 940) can be diverted (commonly used), and when the specifications of the game board 13 are changed, the front surface of the game board 13 can be changed. space can be used effectively.

Further, as described above, the front unit 940 is made of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting material) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the prize winning unit. In addition, since it is arranged at a position overlapping the front unit 940 when viewed from the front, the sorting unit 980 can be visually recognized by the player through the front unit 940, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to make the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 visible to the player, it is not essential to form the base plate 60 from a light transmissive material. , affixing a seal to the base plate 60. Alternatively, since the base plate 60 can be painted, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

Further, since the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 is made of a colored translucent (light-transmitting) resin material, it flows down the inside (path) of the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980 through the front unit 940 . A game ball can be visually recognized by a player, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, since the front unit 940 is made of a colorless and transparent (light-transmitting) resin material, and the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980 is made of a colored and semi-transparent (light-transmitting) resin material, Through the unit 940, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction (overlapping direction) with the sorting unit 980 or the replacement unit 1980. FIG. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down while changing its position in the front-rear direction, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The game ball passage of the sorting unit 980 is formed with a ball throwing passage TR0 communicating with the inflow port 982d, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branched from the ball throwing passage TR0. Further, the sorting unit 980 is provided with a detection device SE3 for detecting game balls passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Therefore, when a game machine with different specifications is manufactured by changing from the sorting unit 980 with many passage paths of game balls to the replacement unit 1980 with few passing paths, it is possible to prevent the worker from making a mistake in the number of detectors SE3 to be provided.

That is, in the structure in which the detection device SE3 is arranged in the passage unit 990 arranged on the downstream side of the sorting unit 980 or the exchange unit 1980, the detection device SE3 can be arranged as much as the passage of the sorting unit 980, but the downflow passage When changing from a distribution unit 980 in which two flow passages are formed to a replacement unit 1980 with one flow passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor in the passage unit 990, but the number of flow passages in the distribution unit 980 is There is a possibility that the number of detection devices SE3 will be increased. On the other hand, if the structure is such that the detection devices SE3 are arranged in a passage branched from the ball-throwing passage TR0, when the sorting unit 980 is changed to the replacement unit 1980, the number of the detection devices SE3 corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of the arrangement.

On the other hand, the detection device SE4 for detecting the inflow of game balls into the second winning hole 140 is arranged in the passage unit 990 as described above. Therefore, the detection devices provided in the sorting unit 980 and the replacement unit 1980 can be distributed, and the degree of freedom in arranging the passages can be increased accordingly.

In addition, the replacement unit 1980 is formed with a side wall portion 981b for throwing game balls that flow in from the second winning port 140 at the same position as the sorting unit 980 . Therefore, similarly to the sorting unit 980, when the replacement unit 1980 is arranged in the front unit 940 (the prize winning unit 930), the replacement unit 1980 can be positioned using the side wall portion 981b. That is, regardless of the form of the replacement unit 1980, the position where the rolling portion 943a and the side wall portion 981b are connected is the same. However, positioning can be performed with respect to the front unit 940 .

Furthermore, the positioning of the replacement unit 1980 with respect to the front unit 940 is, like the distribution unit 980, aimed at suppressing the occurrence of a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the rolling part 943a and the side wall part 981b. , the target portion can be positioned, so the occurrence of positional deviation (step) can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case of positioning other portions. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the arrangement of the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described. FIG. 119 is a sectional view of the game board 13 along line CXIX-CXIX in FIG. A01.

As shown in FIG. 119, the passages of the front unit 940 and the ball-throwing unit 970 are connected so that they abut in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 119). It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940 .

More specifically, the first ball feeding portion 942g and the inlet 982d have a second projection 982d1 formed in the inlet 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first ball feeding portion 942g. Further, the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b have a projection 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed on the second ball feeding portion 942c.

The second ball feeding portion 942c of the front unit 940 and the side wall portion 981b of the distribution unit 980 are arranged in an internal space surrounded by the arm portion 962e and the wall portion 962f formed in the drive unit 960. FIG.

Here, conventionally, there is a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which game balls pass, and a first member communicating with the first passage of the first member. A game machine is known which has two passages and a second member arranged on the back side of the game board. After flowing down the front side of the game board and flowing into the first passage of the first member, the game ball flows into the second passage of the second member after passing through the first passage, and flows into the second passage of the second member on the back side of the game board. Go through 2 passages. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, and the player can be entertained.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, smooth downflow of the game ball is hindered, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. are requested to do so. However, the game machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the second member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, the game board is inverted A separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required, which is not realistic.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the drive unit 960 is arranged in the front unit 940, the pair of second guides of the front unit 940 are arranged between the opposing protrusions 962g of the drive unit 960. Wall 942d is inserted. When the ball feeding unit 970 is arranged in the front unit 940, the side wall portion 981b of the sorting unit 970 is inserted between the arm portions 962e from which the projecting portions 962g project.

That is, the drive unit 960 has a projecting portion 962g (guide portion 962b) that engages with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and an arm portion 962e (guide portion 962b) that engages with the side wall portion 981b of the ball feeding unit 970. and As a result, the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 can be positioned using the guide portion 962b of the drive unit 960. FIG.

The arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is positioned outside the pair of second ball feeding portions 942c of the front unit 940 in the facing direction. As a result, the protruding portion 962g of the arm portion 962e of the guide portion 962b is engaged with the second guide wall 942d of the front unit 940, and the arm portion 962e is engaged with the side wall portion 981b of the ball throwing unit 970, respectively. Positioning of the ball throwing unit 970 with respect to 940 can be performed effectively. That is, the positioning of the ball throwing unit 970 with respect to the front unit 940 is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the second ball throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b. (The connecting portion between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b) can be directly positioned by the guide portion 962b (the arm portion 962e). It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of positional deviation (step).

Further, the drive unit 960 having the guide portion 962b is arranged in the internal space of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 while being arranged in the front unit 940. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide an opening for arranging the drive unit 960 . That is, since the through hole 60a for disposing the connecting portion between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b of the front unit 940 can be used also as an arrangement space, the number of processing steps can be reduced accordingly. , the product cost can be reduced.

As described above, the drive unit 960 having the guide portion 962b is arranged (formed so as to be held) in the front unit 940 having the second ball feeding portion 942c. When attaching the ball throwing units 970, there is no need to separately attach the drive unit 960. By attaching the front unit 940, the drive unit 960 can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of attachment can be improved accordingly.

Further, when the drive unit 960 is arranged in the front unit 940, the projecting portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball feeding portion 942c, respectively. be. Therefore, after the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 are attached to the base plate 60, the projecting portion 962g and the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 are engaged with the second guide wall 942d and the second ball feeding portion 942c, respectively. No need to do it separately. Therefore, the mounting workability can be improved accordingly.

Furthermore, when the drive unit 960 is arranged in the front unit 940, the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 is formed to engage with the ball throwing unit 970 from the opposite side of the front unit 940. By attaching the drive unit 960 to the rear surface of the base plate 60 after attaching the front unit 940 and the drive unit 960 at the same time, the arm 962e of the drive unit 960 can be engaged with the ball throwing unit 970 at the same time as the attachment operation. can. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

As described above, the wall portion 962f is connected between the pair of arm portions 962e facing each other. Displacement member 966 described above is disposed between rear base 941 and opposite side. Therefore, it is unnecessary to separately provide a member for guiding the displacement of the displacement member 966 . Therefore, the structure of the front unit 940 can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

Further, in this case, the wall portion 962f of the guide portion 962b is arranged at a position facing the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 into which the projections 945b of the pair of feather members 945 are inserted in the opening direction thereof. Therefore, the wall portion 962f of the drive unit 960 blocks the opening of the sliding groove 966a2 of the displacement member 966 from the outside, thereby suppressing dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the sliding of the projecting portion 966a by dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove 966a2, and to stably open or close the pair of blade members.

Next, referring to FIGS. 120 and 121, the connection state will be described using the connection between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b as a typical example. 120(a) and 121(a) are partial enlarged sectional views of the game board 13 in the range CXXa of FIG. 119, and FIGS. 120(b) and 121(b) are CXXb of FIG. - It is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line CXXb. 121(a) and 121(b) show a state in which the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are separated by a predetermined amount from the positions shown in FIGS. 120(a) and 120(b). be.

As shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the protrusion 981b1 and the second concave cutout 942c1 are set such that the distance L38 between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius of the game ball is substantially the same.

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowed down from the first passage member pass. machine is known. However, in the structure that connects the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, positional deviation between the two cannot be avoided. There is a problem that a step is formed at the connecting portion of the ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

Also, the winning hole unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are fastened and fixed to both sides of the base plate 60 as described above. Therefore, if there is an error in the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (the thickness is increased), the prize winning unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 may separate in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 (horizontal direction in FIG. 120(a)). There is In that case, there is a problem that a gap is formed between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the upstream end portion of the projection 981b1 are formed with different positions in the passage direction of the game ball, the game ball is placed on the bottom side of the step. It is possible to make the timing of passing through and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface side different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side at the same time. can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 121, the gap K1 of the space formed between the game ball rolling portion 943a of the second ball feeding portion 942c and the game ball rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 981b and the second ball feeding portion It is formed at a different position in the rolling direction of the game ball (horizontal direction in FIG. 121(a)) from the gap K2 of the space formed between the second concave cut portion 942c1 of the 942c and the projection 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball rolling from the second ball feeding portion 942c to the side wall portion 981b from entering both the gap K1 and the gap K2. Therefore, the gap formed between the connecting portion of the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b can reduce the maximum value of the resistance that the game ball receives. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stopping in the gap between the second ball feeding portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 of the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the sliding grooves 966a2 are formed linearly has been described. It has a concave portion 8966a6 recessed toward the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upward in FIG. 122)), and is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the rear. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 122 is a rear view of the front unit 940 and displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment. Note that FIG. 122 corresponds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the displacement member 8966 in the eighth embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c penetrating in the plate thickness direction at substantially the center position when viewed from the front. The second opening 966c has an inner edge shape that is larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941 when viewed from the front. 2 winning openings 140 are arranged.

In addition, the displacement member 8966 includes a protruding portion 966a that protrudes in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 122) from one end side (upper side in FIG. 122) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 122) and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (lower side in FIG. 122). ) toward the rear side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 122).

The protruding portion 966a includes a sliding groove 8966a2 that penetrates the displacement member 8966 in the plate thickness direction, and contact portions 966a1 that are positioned on both lateral sides of the displacement member 8966 and extend in the longitudinal direction. Prepare.

The slide groove 8966a2 is a hole into which the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is inserted, and extends in the lateral direction of the displacement member 966. The recessed portion 8966a6 extends outward in the lateral direction on the other side of the gravity direction (gravity direction). It is recessed toward the direction upper side (upper side in FIG. 122).

The width dimension in the lateral direction of the recessed portion 8966a6 is set to be larger than the maximum dimension between the opposing outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 945b. The side surface of the protrusion 945b on the moving side extends in a direction substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the protrusion 945b (horizontal direction in FIG. 122), and the extending direction coincides with the direction of the protrusion 945b of the blade member 945 in the closed state. It is parallel to the first surface 945b1.

Therefore, when the feather member 945 is closed, at least part of the projection 945b can be accommodated inside the recess 8966a6, and when the feather member 945 is rotated, the first surface 945b1 becomes the inner surface of the recess 8966a6. Displacement of the protrusion 945b can be restricted by contact.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the transmission member 965 (solenoid 610) side, the displacement member 8966 is slid to the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in the gravitational direction) so that the projection 945b of the feather member 945 is displaced into the recess 8966a6. can be extracted from the inside of the As a result, the projection 945b can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the sliding groove 8966a2 to displace the projection 945b.

That is, when the driving force is transmitted from the blade member 945, the transmission of the driving force to the transmission member 965 side can be restricted. can be disengaged from the projection 945b to be displaceable. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forced opening of the feather member 945 from the outside.

Furthermore, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the displacement member 8966 is slid to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). In addition, since the recessed portion 8966a6 is recessed toward the other side in the gravitational direction (gravitational direction), the projection 945b can be received as the displacement member 8966 slides. Therefore, the weight (self weight) of the displacement member 8966 can be used to easily maintain the state in which the protrusion 945b is received in the recess 8966a6.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 of the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment described above, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 has a tip disposed inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. However, in the ninth embodiment, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

123(a) and 123(b) are sectional views of the drive unit 8960 and the displacement member 966 in the ninth embodiment. 123(a) and 123(b) correspond to FIG. 96(a). Further, FIG. 123(a) shows the closed state of the feather member 945, and FIG. 123(b) shows that the feather member 945 in the closed state is illegally operated (forcibly opened) by the player to change the closed state to the open state. The engaged state in the middle of being displaced to .

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment is formed to be bent in a side view, and has a distal end portion 9965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and the distal end portion 9965a. It is formed from a rotating portion 965b that is continuous and extends toward the connecting member 964 side.

As in the seventh embodiment, the width dimension of the distal end portion 9965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c is reduced as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. The distal end portion 9965a has an insertion portion 9965e that is inserted into the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 at the distal end thereof, and a standing portion that protrudes toward one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity) from the connection side of the rotating shaft 965c. and a setting portion 965f.

The insertion portion 9965e has an outer shape smaller than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 when viewed from the front. Projected from 966b1. In addition, the insertion portion 9966e includes an engaging portion 9965e3 that protrudes from the connecting hole 966b1 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and protrudes toward the inner surface side of the connecting hole 966b1 from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). bulged portion 965e1.

The engaging portion 9965e3 is formed so as to protrude in the displacement direction (gravitational direction) of the displacement member 966, and is formed at a position where the contact surface 9965e4 on the side of the rotating shaft 965c separates the front surface of the displacement member 966 by a small gap. be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123(b), when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y (the other side of the direction of gravity), the front surface of the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 are brought into contact with each other to transmit the displacement. Displacement of the member 9965 can be regulated.

More specifically, when the displacement member 966 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y, the contact portion 966b2 on one side of the connecting hole 966b1 contacts the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965, and the transmission member 9965 is rotationally displaced. . In this case, the insertion portion 9965e of the transmission member 9965 is displaced in the direction of the arrow Y and displaced toward the rotating shaft 965c by the rotational displacement. Therefore, the contact surface 9965e4 can be brought into contact with the front surface of the displacement member 966 by displacing the insertion portion 9965e toward the rotating shaft 965c. Since this restricts the displacement of the transmission member 9965, the displacement of the displacement member 966 in the direction of the arrow Y is similarly restricted.

On the other hand, when the drive is transmitted from the solenoid 610 (the connecting member 964 is displaced), the transmission member 965 stops rotating before the displacement member 966, so that the insertion portion 9965e and the displacement member 966 are displaced. Contact can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement member 966 can be displaced by rotationally displacing the transmission member 965 .

As described above, the displacement member 966 is connected to the projections 945b of the pair of feather members 945. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive is transmitted from the feather member 945 side, the displacement member 966 and the contact surface 9965e4 abut to restrict the rotation of the transmission member 9965. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the feather member 945 from being forcibly opened from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 9965 in the ninth embodiment includes an insertion portion 9965e and an engaging portion 9965e3 projecting from the distal end of the insertion portion 9965e. When one side of the insertion portion 9965e is brought into contact with the other side contacted portion 966b3 of the displacement member 966, the engaging portion 9965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 966. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the feather member 945 is forcibly released from the outside, the engaging portion 9965e3 and the displacement member 966 can be engaged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forced opening of the feather member 945 from the outside.

Next, referring to FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 and displacement member 10966 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 is arranged only inside the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966. However, in the tenth embodiment, the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 The tip of the portion 10965e is engaged with the connecting hole 10966b. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be simplified.

124(a) and 124(b) are sectional views of the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 in the tenth embodiment. 124(a) corresponds to FIG. 96(a), and FIG. 124(b) corresponds to FIG. 96(b). 124(a) illustrates the closed state of the feather member 945, and FIG. 124(b) illustrates the open state of the feather member 945. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 124, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment is bent when viewed from the side, and has a distal end portion 10965a extending in the displacement direction of the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610, and the distal end portion 10965a. It is formed from a rotating portion that is continuous and extends toward the connecting member 964 side.

As in the seventh embodiment, the width dimension of the distal end portion 10965a in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 965c is reduced as the distance from the solenoid 610 increases. In addition, the distal end portion 10965a projects from the connecting side of the rotating shaft 965c to an inserting portion 10965e inserted into a connecting hole 10966b of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). and a standing portion 965f.

The insertion portion 10965e is smaller in outer shape in front view than the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 10966b of the displacement member 10966, and is inserted inside the connecting hole 10966b. The insertion portion 10965e includes an engaging portion 10965e3 that protrudes from one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) and a bulging portion that protrudes from the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) toward the inner surface of the connecting hole 966b1. 964d1.

The engaging portion 10965e3 is formed in a plate-like shape that curves around the axis of the rotating shaft 965c, and is arranged inside a concave portion 10966d of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, when the feather member 945 is closed. Further, the displacement member 10966 has a contact surface 10965e4 on the side surface (inner surface) on the rotating shaft 965c side. The abutment surface 10966d4 is arranged to face an abutment surface 10966dc of a displacement member 10966, which will be described later, with a predetermined gap therebetween when the feather member 945 is closed.

The displacement member 10966 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c penetrating therethrough in the plate thickness direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 124(a)) substantially at the center position when viewed from the front. The second opening 966c has an inner edge that is larger than the second winning opening 140 and the second ball throwing portion 942c (see FIG. 88) of the back base 941 when viewed from the front, and the second ball throwing portion 942c is inserted inside. is placed in As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown to the side opposite to the game area through the second winning hole 140 from colliding with the inner edge of the displacement member 966 .

The displacement member 10966 includes a protruding portion 966a protruding in the lateral direction from one end in the longitudinal direction, a bulging portion 966b bulging rearward from the other end in the longitudinal direction, and a surface opposite to the bulging portion 966b. It mainly includes a recess 10966d that is recessed.

The recessed portion 10966d is recessed so as to continue to the contacted portion 966b3 on the other side of the connecting hole 966b1, and has a contacted surface 10966d1 on the side surface on the bulging portion 966b side. The abutted surface 10966d1 is curved around the axis of the rotation shaft 965c of the transmission member 10965 described above when the blade member 945 is closed, and has a slight gap with the abutment surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965. They are arranged to face each other at a distance. In addition, the abutted surface 10966d1 has an inclined surface 10966d2 at the end connected to the connecting hole 966b1.

The inclined surface 10966d2 is formed so as to incline toward the rear side toward the one-side contacted portion 966b2. In addition, the inclined surface 10966d2 is formed radially inward of the abutted surface 10966d1 centered on the rotation shaft 965c.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the distance dimension between the connecting hole 966b1 from the other side contacted portion 966b3 to the one side contacted portion 966b2 is the insertion portion in the front view with the feather member 945 closed. It is set larger than the width dimension L39 (see FIG. 124(a)) of 10965e in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated, the abutment surface 10965e4 is displaced toward the rear side, so that the abutment surface 10965e4 and the abutted surface 10966d1 come into contact with each other, thereby restricting the rotation of the transmission member 10965. can be suppressed.

According to the drive unit 10960 and the displacement member 10966 configured as described above, when the blade member 945 is displaced to the open state, when the solenoid 610 is driven, the drive is transmitted from the coupling member 964 to the transmission member 10965. be done. As a result, the transmission member 10965 is rotated about the rotating shaft 965c. As described above, the abutment surface 10965e4 of the transmission member 10965 and the abutted surface 10966d1 of the displacement member 10966 are curved around the rotation shaft 965c. When the contact surface 10965e4 is rotated, the contact surface 10965e4 is displaced while maintaining a slight gap from the contacted surface 10966d1. That is, the abutment surface 10965e4 and the abutted surface 10966d1 are displaced without interfering with each other.

As described above, the distance dimension between the opposing contact portion 966b3 of the connecting hole 966b1 and the contact contact portion 966b2 of the one side is formed to be larger than the width dimension L36 of the transmission member 10965. By rotating 10965, the insertion portion 10965e arranged inside the concave portion 10966d of the displacement member 10966 can be brought out to the outside of the concave portion 10966d. As a result, the bulging portion 965e1 of the transmission member 10965 is brought into contact with the contact portion 10966b3 on the other side, and the displacement member 10966 can be slidably displaced. Therefore, the pair of feather members 945 can be displaced to the open state.

Further, when the pair of feather members 945 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the tip of the engaging portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 slides along the inclined surface 10966d2 formed on the contacted surface 10966d1. Thus, the engaging portion 10965e3 can be displaced inside the concave portion 10966d while displacing the displacement member 10966 to one side in the direction of gravity (downward in the direction of gravity).

On the other hand, when driving is transmitted from the pair of feather members 945 when displacing the pair of feather members 945 to the open state, the driving is transmitted from the displacement member 10966 to the transmission member 10965 . In this case, the displacement member 10966 is slid while the engagement portion 10965e3 of the transmission member 10965 is arranged inside the concave portion 10966d of the displacement member 10966 . Therefore, since the transmission member 965 is rotationally displaced as the displacement member 10966 is slid, the engagement portion 10965e3 is displaced rearward by the rotational displacement. Therefore, the contact surface 10965e4 of the engaging portion 10965e3 contacts the contacted surface 10966d1 of the recess 10966d, and the rotational displacement of the transmission member 10965 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forced opening of the feather member 945 from the outside.

That is, the transmission member 10965 in the tenth embodiment includes an insertion portion 10965e and an engaging portion 10965e3 projecting from the distal end of the insertion portion 10965e. One side of the insertion portion 10965e in the direction of gravity is brought into contact with 966b2, the engaging portion 10965e3 is engaged with the displacement member 10966, and the other side of the insertion portion 10965e in the direction of gravity (bulging portion When the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the other side in the gravitational direction to the position where the transmission member 10965e1) abuts, the engagement of the engaging portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released. The sliding displacement of the member 10966 to the other side in the gravitational direction is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the feather member 945 from being forcibly protected from the outside.

On the other hand, when the transmission member 10965 is rotated to the position where the engaging portion 10965e3 comes out of the concave portion 10966d of the displacement member 10966, the engagement of the engaging portion 10965e3 with the displacement member 10966 is released. By further rotating the member 10965 toward the other side in the direction of gravity, the displacement member 10966 can be slid toward the other side in the direction of gravity, and the feather member 945 can be released.

Next, the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the displacement member 966 is not arranged in the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140, but the displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment is from the second winning opening 140. is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and displacement member 11966 in the eleventh embodiment. 126(a) and 126(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and displacement member 11966. FIG. 126(a) illustrates the closed state of the feather member 945, and FIG. 126(b) illustrates the open state of the feather member 945. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the front unit 940 according to the eleventh embodiment has a pair of second guide walls 11942b extending in the direction of gravity on both sides of the second winning hole 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling part 943a arranged between the opposing second ball-feeding parts 942c is set substantially at the same position as the projecting tip position of the second ball-feeding part 942c.

A pair of second guide walls 11942b are formed with first tooth flanks 11942b1 of gear tooth flanks on opposite sides thereof. In addition, the pair of second guide walls 11942b are set so that the distance between them facing each other is larger than the width dimension of the displacement member 11966 described later in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 126(a)). is arranged.

The first tooth surface 11942b1 is meshed with a first gear GY1 pivotally supported by a displacement member 11966, which will be described later. As a result, the displacement member 11966 slides to rotate the first gear GY1 that meshes with the first tooth surface 11942b1.

The displacement member 11966 includes a first member 11967 formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, a second member 11968 disposed on the first member 11967 in a displaceable state, and a shaft on the first member 11967. and a first gear GY1 that is supported and meshed with the second member 11968.

The first member 11967 has a second opening 966c penetrating in the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in a front view. The first member 11967 has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 11966 and the second opening 966c on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 966c. A supporting portion 11966d and a sliding projection 11966e are formed so as to protrude in an annular shape on both sides in the widthwise direction of the sandwiched portion.

The support portion 11966d protrudes toward the first member 11967, and its tip end is inserted into the shaft hole of the first gear GY1. As a result, the first gear GY1 can be supported by the first member 11967 in a rotatable state.

The sliding projection 11966e protrudes toward the first member 11967 and has its tip inserted inside the sliding groove 11968b of the second member 11968 . Thereby, the second member 11968 can be arranged on the first member 11967 .

The second member 11968 is formed of a metal material in a substantially gate-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front. A slide groove 11968b is formed in the plate thickness direction along the extending direction of the two tooth surfaces 11968a1 (the vertical direction in FIG. 126(a)), and the horizontal direction of the inner edge formed in the gate shape. It is formed with a blade portion 11968c inclined in the plate thickness direction on the end face extending to the plate.

The pair of second tooth flanks 11968a1 are each meshed with the first gear GY1. As a result, the rotation of the first gear GY1 can be transmitted from both horizontal side surfaces of the second member 11968 on which the second tooth surfaces 11968a1 are formed.

The sliding groove 11968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extension direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1 as described above, and the sliding projection 11966e of the first member 11967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 11968 can be slidably displaced with respect to the first member 11967 by the gap between the sliding groove 11968b and the sliding projection 11966e.

Therefore, when the pair of first gears GY1 are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the first member 11967 as described above, the rotation of the first gear GY1 is transmitted from the second tooth surface 11968a1 to the second member 11968, The second member 11968 is displaced in the extending direction of the second tooth surface 11968a1.

The blade portion 11968c is formed to be inclined downward toward the first member 11967 side, and the lower end portion of the blade portion 11968c is lower than the inner surface of the second ball throwing portion 942c on the other end side in the direction of gravity when the feather member 945 is closed. , is arranged on the other end side in the direction of gravity. Thereby, the tip of the blade portion 11968c can be arranged on the other end side in the direction of gravity from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing in from the second winning hole 140 .

Also, the protruding distance of the second ball feeding portion 942c is set to a length that makes contact with the rear side of the second member 11968 . As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the tip position of the rolling part 943a arranged between the opposing second ball-feeding parts 942c is set at substantially the same position as the tip position of the second ball-feeding part 942c. As a result, the foreign object inserted into the second prize winning port 140 can be cut by the end portion of the rolling surface flowing in from the second prize winning port 140 and the blade portion 11968c.

According to the displacement member 11966 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. And since it can be arranged below the tip of the second ball feeding portion 942c in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is cut off by an unauthorized operation while the drive is not transmitted from the solenoid 610 of the drive unit 960. When 945b is forcibly opened, the displacement member 11966 can restrict the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140. FIG.

On the other hand, when the feather member 945 is in the open state, the transmission member 965 displaces the first member 11967 of the displacement member 11966 upward, thereby displacing the second member 11968 . The amount of displacement of the first member 11967 is set larger than the radius of the game ball. As described above, the second member 11968 is displaced twice as much as the displacement of the first member 11967 with respect to the rear base 941, so that a game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 A distance greater than the diameter of the game ball can be separated from the rolling portion 943a that serves as the rolling surface. As a result, when the feather member 945 is in the open state, it is possible to allow the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 to flow down.

That is, the second member 11968 traverses the path of the game balls flowing down from the second winning port 140 when the displacement member 11966 is slid from the position to open the feather member 945 to the position to close it, and the edge of the path. Since it is provided with a blade portion that rubs against the portion (the end of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c), it is possible to cut an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the rolling passage of the game ball from the second winning port 140. can be done.

For example, the tip of a string is attached to a game ball, and the game ball is made to enter from the second winning hole 140 and pass through the rolling part 943a, thereby detecting the passage of the game ball. ), the other end of the string is manipulated (pulled out, drawn) to cause the game ball to reciprocate, thereby causing the detection device SE4 to detect it multiple times. With respect to such cheating, according to the eleventh embodiment, even if the above-described game ball is entered in a state where the feather member 945 is opened, the displacement member 11966 (the second member 11968) is slid and displaced, and when the blade portion 11968c crosses the passage of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, the blade portion 11968c cuts the middle portion of the string whose tip is adhered to the game ball. and press against the edge of the rolling portion 943a or the second ball-feeding portion 942c. The thread can be cut between the rolling portion 943a or the edge of the second ball feeding portion 942c. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

Next, the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. FIG. In the seventh embodiment described above, the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling path of the game ball from the second winning opening 140, but the displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment does not move from the second winning opening 140. is placed on the rolling path of the game ball. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear base 941 and displacement member 12966 in the twelfth embodiment. 128(a) and 128(b) are rear views of the front unit 940 and displacement member 12966. FIG. 128(a) illustrates the closed state of the feather member 945, and FIG. 128(b) illustrates the open state of the feather member 945. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the front unit 940 according to the twelfth embodiment has a pair of second guide walls 12942b extending in the direction of gravity on both sides of the second winning hole 140 in the horizontal direction. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the projecting distances of the second ball feeding portion 942c and the rolling portion 943a are set short, and the projecting end surface is set at a position where it abuts on the front surface of the first member 12967 of the displacement member 12966, which will be described later. be.

In addition, the front unit 940 is provided with a first support portion 12942k1 and a second support portion 12942k2 protruding toward the displacement member 12966 on both sides in the horizontal direction of the second winning opening 140 . The first support portion 12942k1 and the second support portion 12942k2 are respectively inserted through the shafts of a first gear GY1 and a second gear GY2, which will be described later, and can pivotally support the first gear GY1 and the second gear GY2.

The pair of second guide walls 12942b has a contact portion 12942b2 protruding in the opposite direction on one end side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) of the opposing side surfaces thereof. The distance dimension between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 facing each other is set slightly larger than the width dimension of the first member 12967 described later in the lateral direction. As a result, the first member 12967 can be disposed between the pair of contact portions 12942b2 facing each other, and the sliding displacement of the first member 12967 can be guided.

The displacement member 12966 is composed of a first member 12967 formed of a vertically long rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front, a second member 12968 disposed on the first member 12967 in a displaceable state, and a rear base 941 pivotally supported. 12967, and a second gear GY2 pivotally supported by the rear base 941 and meshed with the second member 12968.

The first gear GY1 is a gear having tooth surfaces on its outer peripheral surface, and as described above, is pivotally supported by the first support portion 12942k1 of the rear base 941, and its tooth surfaces are connected to the first member 12967 and the second gear. It is meshed with GY2.

The second gear GY2 is a multi-stage gear composed of two stages of gears of different sizes, and is formed with a small-diameter gear GY2a on the small-diameter side and a large-diameter gear GY2b on the large-diameter side. The second gear GY2 is pivotally supported by the second support portion 12942k2 of the rear base 941 as described above, and the tooth surface of the small-diameter gear GY2a meshes with the first gear GY1. A face is mated with the second member 12968 .

The first member 12967 is made of a metal material, and has a second opening 12966c penetrating in the plate thickness direction at a substantially central position in a front view. In addition, the first member 12967 has a pair of sliding grooves 966a2 extending along the lateral direction of the first member 12967 on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the second opening 12966c, and the second opening. A sliding projection 12966e projecting annularly on both lateral sides of 12966c and third gear tooth flanks 12966f on both sides extending in the longitudinal direction are formed.

The second opening 12966c has an inner edge shape larger than the inner edge shape of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 941 as viewed from the front. In addition, the second opening 12966c is provided with a second blade portion 12966c2 on the inner surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity).

The second blade portion 12966c2 is formed to be inclined downward from the rear base 941 side toward the second member 12968 side described later. In the second opening 12966c, the second blade portion 12966c2 is disposed on the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140 in a state in which the pair of feather members 945 are closed, and the pair of feather members 945 In the open state, the second blade portion 12966c2 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game balls flowing into the second winning port 140. As shown in FIG.

The sliding projection 12966e protrudes toward the second member 12968 and has its tip inserted inside the sliding groove 12968b of the second member 12968 . Thereby, the second member 12968 can be arranged on the first member 12967 .

The pair of third tooth flanks 12966f are meshed with the first gear GY1 respectively. As a result, the first member 12967 of the first gear GY1 is slid along with the rotational displacement of the transmission member 965, thereby rotating the first gear GY1. Further, as described above, the first gear GY1 is meshed with the small diameter gear GY2a of the second gear GY2, thereby rotating the second gear GY2.

The second member 12968 is formed of a metal material into a substantially H-shaped plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is disposed with a pair of extended portions directed in the direction of gravity (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). In addition, the second member 12968 has a second tooth flank 12968a of the gear tooth flank on the outside of the pair of extending portions in the facing direction, and along the extending direction of the second tooth flank 12968a (vertical direction in FIG. 128(a)). A sliding groove 12968b is formed through the plate thickness direction in a long hole shape, and a blade portion 6683 is formed on the end surface of the connecting portion connecting the pair of extended portions on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). be done.

The sliding groove 12968b is formed in an elongated hole shape along the extending direction of the second tooth surface 12968a as described above, and the sliding projection 12966e of the first member 12967 is inserted inside. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be slidably displaced in the gravity direction with respect to the first member 12967 by the gap between the sliding groove 12968b and the sliding projection 12966e.

The pair of second tooth flanks 12968a are meshed with the large diameter gear GY2b of the second gear GY2. Therefore, the second member 12968 is slidably displaced by rotating the second gear GY2. As described above, the transmission member 965 slides the first member 12967 to rotate the second gear GY2. Therefore, the second member 12968 can be displaced along with the displacement of the first member 12967 .

In addition, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 are set to slide in opposite directions, and the amount of displacement of the second member 12968 is set to be large due to the small-diameter second gear GY2.

The blade portion 6683 is formed to be inclined upward toward the first member 12967 side, and its upper end portion is located on one side of the second ball throwing portion 942c in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) when the feather member 945 is closed. ) on the other side in the gravitational direction (upper side in the gravitational direction). That is, the second member 12968 is arranged at a position where the blade portion 6683 overlaps the first member 12967 in a front view with the feather member 945 closed.

Therefore, when the pair of feather members 945 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the rolling passage of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c is traversed and the edges of each other are rubbed against each other. Since the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 (displacement member 12966) are provided with the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage from the second prize winning opening 140. can.

For example, the tip of a string is adhered to a game ball, the game ball is made to enter from the second prize winning port 140, and passed through the rolling passage of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c, and the detection device SE4 is detected. When the game ball reaches the detection position of , the other end of the string is operated (pulled out, drawn) to reciprocate the game ball, thereby causing the detection device SE4 to detect it multiple times. With respect to such cheating, according to the present invention, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the pair of feather members 945 opened, the pair of feather members 945 are displaced from the open position to the closed position. Then, when the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683 cross the passage of the passage member, the middle portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is placed between the pair of the second blade portion 12966c2 and the blade portion 6683. Can be pinched and cut. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the state where the feather member 945 is opened, the blade portion 6683 of the second member 12968 is located on the other side of the gravity direction from the rolling surface (rolling portion 943a) of the game ball entering the second winning hole 140. placed. As described above, when the feather member 945 is opened, the second blade portion 12966c2 of the first member 12967 is arranged outside the rolling path of the game ball flowing into the second winning port 140. Therefore, in a state in which the pair of feather members 945 are opened, the game ball flowing into the second winning opening 140 can pass between the blade portion 6683 and the second blade portion 966c2.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the first member 12967 and the second member 12968 can block the rolling passage of the game ball entering the second winning port 140, so the displacement distance of the second member 12968 is reduced to the eleventh. It can be less than the second member 11968 in the embodiment. As a result, the rolling passage of the game balls flowing into the second winning port 140 can be closed in a short time, and the game balls flowing in at the timing when the pair of feather members 945 are closed can flow into the rolling passage. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 129, a drive unit 13960 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment described above, the transmission of the driving force from the solenoid 610 to the blade member 945 is performed through the connecting member 964, the transmission member 965, and the displacement member 966. However, in the thirteenth embodiment, the solenoid 610 The transmission of drive from to the blade member 945 is performed by one member. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 129(a) is a rear view of the front unit 940 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 129(b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along line CXXIXb-CXXIXb of FIG. 129(a). In addition, in FIG. 129(b), only the outer shape of the specific winning port unit 950 is illustrated with a chain line for easy understanding. Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a, the pair of feather members 945 is closed, and the shaft portion 961b protrudes from the main body portion 961a. In this case, the pair of feather members 945 are opened.

As shown in FIG. 129, the drive unit 13960 in the thirteenth embodiment is arranged on the back side of the specific winning hole unit 950 (on the right side in FIG. 129(b) in the vertical direction). A transmission member 13965 is connected to the annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 .

The transmission member 13965 includes a base portion 7658 extending from the solenoid 610 side toward the front unit 940 side, and an end portion of the base portion 7658 on the front unit 940 side toward the projection 945b side of the feather member 945. and an engaging portion 13965j.

The annular portion 961c of the solenoid 610 is connected to the base portion 7658 at the end opposite to the engaging portion 13965j. Accordingly, by driving the shaft portion 961b of the solenoid 610 in its axial direction, the transmission member 13965 can be slidably displaced.

The engaging portion 13965j is formed at a position overlapping the projections 945b of the pair of feather members 945 in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 129(a)) when viewed from the rear (or viewed from the front). In addition, the engaging portion 13965j is set to have a length that exceeds the projection 945b of the feather member 945, and overlaps the projection 945b when viewed from the front.

In addition, a support portion 13965j1 having a substantially C shape in a side view projects from the upright end of the engaging portion 13965j. The supporting portion 13965j1 is set so that the facing dimension inside the opening is larger than the maximum dimension of the outer shape of the projection 945b. In addition, the width dimension of the support portion 13965j1 in the facing direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 129(a)) of the pair of engaging portions 13965j is set larger than the displacement distance of the projection 945b. Therefore, the protrusion 945b can be arranged inside the opening of the support portion 13965j1.

Therefore, when the connecting portion 10965h is slid in the direction of gravity as described above, the engaging portion 9965j is slid in the direction of gravity, and the protrusion 945b is displaced along with the displacement. By displacing the protrusion 945b, the feather member 945 can be displaced to the open state.

According to the drive unit 13960 configured as described above, the drive unit 13960 for driving the pair of feather members 945 and the drive unit 957 for driving the plate member 951 are disposed on the back side of the plate member 951, A space can be formed on the back side of the feather member 945 (second winning port 140). That is, by concentrating the space for arranging the drive unit 13960 and the drive unit 957 on the back side of the pair of feather members 945, the space for arranging other members and devices is provided for the pair of feather members 945 (second prize winner). It can be secured on the back side of the port 140), and the space can be effectively utilized accordingly.

Next, the displacement member 14966 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the displacement member 966 is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the insertion portion 965e of the transmission member 965 when viewed from the front. A case where the inner edge shape of the connecting hole 966b1 of the member 14966 is formed to be sufficiently larger than the outer shape of the transmission member 965 will be described. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 130(a) and 131(a) are rear views of the winning opening unit 930 in the fourteenth embodiment. 130(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along line CXXXb-CXXXb of FIG. 130(a), and FIG. 131(b) is a winning opening unit 930 along line CXXXIb-CXXXIb of FIG. 131(a). is a cross-sectional view of.

In addition, in FIGS. 130(a) and 131(a), the outer shape of the pair of feather members 945 is illustrated with chain lines. 130(a) and 130(b) show the closed state of the pair of feather members 945, and in FIGS. The open state of the pair of feather members 945 in the case of being closed is illustrated. Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the specific prize winning opening 65a is formed at a position farther apart from the second winning opening 140 than in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the displacement member 14966 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and has a second opening 966c at approximately the center position when viewed from the front. It is formed to penetrate in the plate thickness direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 130(b)).

The displacement member 14966 has a projecting portion 966a projecting in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 130(a)) from one end (the upper side in FIG. 130(a)) in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 130(a)), A bulging portion 14966b that bulges from the end side (lower side in FIG. 130(b)) toward the back side (back base 941 side (see FIG. 85)) is provided.

The bulging portion 14966b is formed to bulge toward the back side (back base 941 side), and a laterally long rectangular connecting hole 14966b1 is formed in the inner portion in the rear view. The connecting hole 14966b1 is an opening into which the tip (insertion portion 965e) of the transmission member 965 of the drive unit 960, which will be described later, is inserted.

The connecting hole 14966b1 has an inner edge shape that is substantially square in a front view, and a contact portion 966b2 on the inner peripheral surface on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 130(a))). , and the other side abutted portion 966b3 on the inner peripheral surface on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 90(a))).

The connecting hole 14966b1 is formed such that the distance L40 between the facing parts in the direction of gravity (from the contact part 966b3 on the other side to the contact part 14966b2 on the one side) is sufficiently larger than the width dimension L41 of the insertion part 965e in the direction of gravity. When the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the insertion portion 965e contacts the contact portion 966b3 on the other side.

In the connection hole 14966b1, the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the gravity direction from the separation distance L40 between the opposite sides in the gravity direction (from the other side contact portion 966b3 to the one side contact portion 14966b2) is It is set larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling part 943a to the inner edge of the second opening 966c of the displacement member 14966 (L40-L41)>(L42-game ball diameter). As a result, when the displacement member 14966 falls to one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity), the edge of the displacement member 14966 blocks the rolling path of the game balls flowing in from the second winning opening 140 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b), a case where the projections 945b of the pair of feather members 945 are cut will be described. As described above, the separation distance L40 between the connecting holes 14966b1 is formed sufficiently larger than the width L41 of the insertion portion 965e in the direction of gravity, and when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the other side cover is closed. Since the insertion portion 965e abuts against the abutment portion 966b3, as shown in FIGS. The displacement member 14966 freely falls to one side in the direction of gravity by the gap between the portion 966b2 and the insertion portion 965e.

As described above, the connecting hole 14966b1 is set so that the dimension obtained by subtracting the width dimension L41 from the separation distance L40 is larger than the dimension obtained by subtracting the diameter of the game ball from the separation distance L42 (L40-L41)>(L42 -Diameter of the game ball), the displacement member 14966 is allowed to fall freely, so that the edge of the displacement member 14966 blocks the rolling path of the game ball flowing in from the second winning port 140 .

That is, in the fourteenth embodiment, when the pair of feather members 945 are out of communication with the sliding grooves 966a2 of the displacement member 14966 (states shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b)), the displacement member 14966 is arranged in the passage of the game ball flowing in from the second winning port 140, for example, even if the protrusion 945b of the feather member 945 is cut and the feather member 945 is forcibly opened from the outside, the second A displacement member 14966 can regulate the flow of a game ball that has entered from the prize winning opening 140 .

Next, a drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the arm portion 962e of the drive unit 960 is positioned outside the side wall portion 981b of the sorting unit 980. However, in the fifteenth embodiment, the second arm portion 15962j It is arranged and positioned inside the portion 981b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

132(a) is a side view of the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment, FIG. 132(b) is a top view of the drive unit 15960, and FIG. 132(c) is a perspective front view of the drive unit 15960. It is a diagram. 133(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 133(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb of FIG. 133(a). Note that FIG. 133(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a).

First, referring to FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 132, the drive unit 15960 in the fifteenth embodiment is formed in a box shape and includes a first housing portion 15962 and a second housing portion 963 which are arranged to face each other, and a first housing portion 15962 and a second housing portion 963. A solenoid 610 arranged in a space between the second housing portions 963, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a connecting member 964 pivotally supported by the first housing portion 15962 and the second housing portion 963. and a transmission member 965 connected to the .

The first accommodating portion 15962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. ) and a guide portion 15962b protruding toward the center.

The drive unit 15960 is disposed in a space between the first housing portion 962 and the second housing portion 963 which are formed in a box shape and are arranged to face each other. It mainly includes a solenoid 610, a connecting member 964 connected to the solenoid 610, and a transmission member 965 pivotally supported by the first receiving portion 962 and the second receiving portion 963 and connected to the connecting member 964. be done.

The first accommodating portion 962 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and includes a covering portion 962a that covers one side of the solenoid 610 (the upper side in FIG. ) and a guide portion 15962b protruding toward the center.

The guide portion 15962b includes a pair of arm portions 15962e formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side, a wall portion 962f connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e and formed in a gate shape when viewed from the front, and a wall portion 962f connected to the pair of arm portions 15962e. A protruding portion 962g protruding from 962f on the opposite side of covering portion 962a (back base 941 side (see FIG. 125)), and a pair of arm portions 15962e positioned on the other side in the gravity direction and protruding from wall portion 962f. and a third arm 15962h protruding on the opposite side of the second arm 15962j across the wall 962f.

The arm portions 15962e protrude toward the rear base 941 (see FIG. 85) from the opposing wall surfaces of the covering portion 962a, and the protruding tip sides thereof are bent toward the other side in the gravity direction (the side opposite to the solenoid 610 side) in a side view. It is formed in a substantially L shape. In addition, the arm 15962e protrudes in the gravitational direction below the side wall 981b of the distribution unit 980 when the drive unit 15960 and the distribution unit 970 are combined.

The second arm portion 15962j is formed to be connected to the inner edge portion of the wall portion 962f, and the distance L43 between the pair of opposing arms is set smaller than the width dimension between the pair of opposing arms 962e. Also, it is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second arm portion 15962j has a distance dimension in the gravitational direction set to be smaller than the dimension between the opposing side wall portions 981b of the sorting unit 980 in the gravitational direction, and when the drive unit 15960 and the sorting unit 980 are combined, It is inserted inside the side wall portion 981b.

In addition, the pair of second arm portions 15962j are set such that the outer distance in the facing direction is substantially the same as the distance between the side walls 981b facing each other in the horizontal direction. As a result, when disposing the sorting unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) in the winning hole unit 930, positioning can be performed by arranging the second arm portion 15962j inside the side wall portion 981b.

The third arm portion 15962h is set so that the distance dimension between the opposing arms 15962h is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the opposing arms 15962e. Further, the third arm portion 15962h is formed with a protruding portion 15962h1 connected to the rear base 941 side end portion of the second arm portion 15962j.

The protruding portion 15962h1 is set such that the protruding distance from the end of the second arm portion 15962j to the back base 941 (see FIG. 85) is substantially the same as the recess dimension of the second recessed portion 942c1. In addition, when the front unit 940 and the drive unit 15960 are combined, the protruding portion 15962h1 is formed at a position corresponding to the second cutout portion 942c1 and arranged inside the second cutout portion 942c1.

Therefore, since the upstream end of the rolling surface 981c1 of the projecting portion 15962h1 and the side wall portion 981b is formed with different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, the timing of the game ball passing through the step on the bottom side and the side surface The timing of passing through the step on the side can be made different. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface at the same time, and the influence of these is dispersed, so that the game ball can smoothly flow down (pass) accordingly. can.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, the drive unit 15960 can be used for both positioning of the front unit 940 and positioning of the sorting unit 980. becomes. Therefore, the distribution unit 980 side can also easily allow size effects or installation tolerances.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(a), the side wall portion 16981b of the sorting unit 980 and the second ball feeding portion 16942c of the winning opening unit 930 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the projection 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second concave cutout portion 942c1 of the second ball feeding portion 942c, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the second ball feeding portion 16942c 16942c2 is disposed inside the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(a) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134(a) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(a), the side wall portion 16981b of the sorting unit 980 according to the sixteenth embodiment has a standing front end surface that faces the winning opening unit when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate. It is formed in a dimension to abut on the tip of the second ball feeding portion 16942c of 930. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the side wall portion 16981b has a recessed cutout portion 16981b2 recessed on the erected distal end surface toward the erected proximal end side. The recess 16981b2 is formed at a position radially separated from the game ball in the direction of gravity from the rolling surface 981c1, and its recessed shape in side view is the shape of a protrusion 16942c2 of the second ball feeding portion 16942c, which will be described later. is set to be substantially the same as

As a result, when a game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface of the through hole 981c, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be given later.

In addition, the recessed portion 16981b2 is recessed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a side view, and the inner surface of the side wall portion 16981b on the side of the erected base end is inclined downward along the rolling direction of the game ball. As a result, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the through hole 981c can be prevented from bouncing upward at the switching portion of the rolling path of the game ball.

That is, in the sixteenth embodiment, since the recessed end face of the recessed cutout 16981b2 is formed to be inclined downward along the passage direction of the game ball, the game ball that collides with the recessed end face of the recessed cutout 16981b2 can be pressed against the rolling surface 981c1 (bottom surface). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from jumping up and bouncing on the recessed end face of the recessed cutout 16981b2. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down).

The projection 16942c2 is formed so as to protrude from the protruding distal end surface of the second ball feeding portion 16942c, and its outer shape in a side view is set to be substantially the same as that of the recessed portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b. As a result, when a game ball rolling on the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 is thrown to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980, the game ball is placed on the recessed portion 16981b2 of the distribution unit 980. It is possible to suppress being caught inside. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down) from the rolling portion 943a of the winning opening unit 930 to the rolling surface 981c1 of the distribution unit 980.

In addition, in the sixteenth embodiment, the recessed cutout portion 16981b2 of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end portion of the rolling surface 981c1 are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, so that the game ball is placed on the bottom side. It is possible to make the timing of passing through the steps on the side surface different from the timing of passing through the steps on the side surface side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side at the same time. can.

Furthermore, according to the sixteenth embodiment, the recessed portion 16981b2 is formed on the downstream side in the rolling direction of the game ball, and the projection 16942c2 is formed on the upstream side, so that the side downstream end of the second ball throwing portion 942c and the rolling direction are formed. The bottom downstream end of moving portion 943a can be adjacent to the side upstream end and the bottom upstream end of sidewall portion 16981b. That is, when the upstream end of the side surface of the second ball feeding portion 942c is formed in a position different from the upstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a on the downstream side in the passage direction of the game ball, the upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b Until the game ball reaches the end, the game ball can be guided by the projection 16942c2 of the second ball feeding portion 942c. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the projection 16942c2 has relatively low rigidity and may be broken. Even so, the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b and the upstream end of the side surface can be maintained in different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. The timing of passing through a step can be made different. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from being affected by the step on the bottom side and the step on the side surface side at the same time, and the influence of these is dispersed, so that the game ball smoothly flows down (passes) accordingly. be able to.

In addition, since the protrusion 16942c2 is formed on the prize-winning unit 930 side and the concave cutout 16981b2 is formed on the sorting unit 980 side, the side surface of the concave cutout 16981b2 is brought into contact with the protrusion 16942c2, and the rolling part 943a positional deviation of the sorting unit 980 to the upper side in the direction of gravity can be regulated. That is, at the step where the bottom surface upstream end of the side wall portion 16981b is higher than the bottom surface downstream end of the rolling portion 943a, the game ball is easily bounced up when riding on it. Compared to the reverse step, it is easy to hinder the smooth downflow (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, the upstream end of the bottom surface of the side wall portion 16981b can be prevented from being displaced upward in the gravity direction with respect to the downstream end of the bottom surface of the rolling portion 943a, which is particularly effective for the smooth flow of game balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the sorting unit 980 and the second ball feeding portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the projection 981b1 of the side wall portion 981b and the end of the second recessed portion 942c1 of the second ball feeding portion 942c are formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the rolling direction of the game ball when viewed from the side. , but in the seventeenth embodiment, the end portions of the second ball feeding portion 17942c and the side wall portion 17981b are formed to be inclined when viewed from the side. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 134(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the seventeenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 134(b) corresponds to FIG. 120(a). As shown in FIG. 134(b), the side wall portion 17981b of the sorting unit 980 in the seventeenth embodiment is formed so that the tip surface 17981b3 at the tip end of the erected portion is inclined downward from the base end side to the tip end side. . In other words, the tip surface 17981b3 is formed to be inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling surface 981c1 of the side wall portion 17981b.

On the other hand, the second ball feeding portion 17942c of the winning opening unit 930 is formed so that the tip surface 17942c3 of the projecting tip surface is inclined upward along the rolling direction of the game ball of the rolling portion 943a. In addition, the tip surface 17942c3 of the second ball-throwing portion 17942c is substantially parallel to the tip surface 17981b3 of the protruding tip of the side wall portion 17981b in the state where the prize-winning unit 930 and the ball-throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate. are placed.

Therefore, since the side upstream end (tip surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, the side upstream end of the side wall portion 17981b is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game ball. As compared with the case of (seventh embodiment), the game ball that collides with the side upper end surface of the side wall portion 17981b can be made to slide along the slope and be less likely to be bounced back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down).

In addition, since the entire side surface upstream end (front end surface 17981b3) of the side wall portion 17981b is formed to be inclined, compared to the case where the side wall portion 17981b is formed in a shape having the recessed portion 16981b2, for example, as in the sixteenth embodiment. , the occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the side wall portion 17981b can be ensured. In addition, when the side wall portion 17981b is formed from a resin material, the shape change of the cavity (hollow portion) of the injection mold can be moderated, so air bubbles (air entrapment) and poor filling can be suppressed to improve the moldability. can be improved.

Next, the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 137. FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the displacement member 966 is not arranged on the rolling path of the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 has been described. It is arranged on the rolling path of the game ball entered from the winning hole 140. - 特許庁In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 135(a), 136(a), and 137(a) are schematic rear views of the winning opening unit 930 in the eighteenth embodiment. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the winning opening unit 930 along the line CXXXVb-CXXXVb. FIG. 136(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 930 along line CXXXVIb-CXXXVIb of FIG. 136(a). FIG. 137(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the prize winning opening unit 930 along line CXXXVIIb-CXXXVIIb of FIG. 137(a).

135 shows the closed state of the pair of feather members 945, FIG. 136 shows the open state of the pair of feather members 945, and FIG. 137 shows the pair of feather members 945 forcibly opened. The states are illustrated. 135(a), 136(a) and 137(a), only the pair of feather members 945, the displacement member 18966 and the second winning opening 140 are illustrated. In FIGS. 135(b), 136(b) and 137(b), only a pair of feather members 945, rear base 941, front base 943, displacement member 18966, transmission member 19958 and solenoid 961 are schematically illustrated. be.

As shown in FIG. 135, the displacement member 18966 in the eighteenth embodiment is formed to have a larger outer shape in the gravitational direction (vertical direction in FIG. 135(a)) than the displacement member 966 in the seventh embodiment. The sliding groove 18966a of the displacement member 18966 is formed in a substantially L-shaped bending shape when viewed from the rear, and is formed by a non-transmitting portion 18966a6 extending in the direction of gravity and a lower end portion of the non-transmitting portion 18966a6 in the direction of gravity. and a transmission portion 18966a7 bent and extending toward the center in the left-right direction.

Further, the displacement member 18966 has the through hole 966c1 arranged below the second winning opening 140 in the direction of gravity when the pair of feather members 945 are closed. As a result, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the game ball passing through the second winning port 140 can be restricted from flowing into the through hole 981c of the ball feeding unit 970 from the rolling portion 943a.

Further, the displacement member 18966 is provided with a blade portion 1896g that slopes toward the front side as it goes downward on the inner peripheral edge of the through hole 966c1 on the upper side in the gravitational direction. The front side of the blade portion 1896g abuts against the protruding tip of the rolling portion 943a and the protruding tip of the second ball feeding portion 942c. That is, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed in a rear view, the blade portion 1896g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball feeding portion 942c are arranged at overlapping positions.

Further, in the transmission member 18958 in the eighteenth embodiment, the rotational range of the distal end portion 965a side is set larger than that in the first embodiment when the solenoid 961 is driven. That is, the displacement dimension in the gravitational direction on the side of the tip portion 965a is set large, and the displacement dimension is set larger than the opening dimension of the second winning opening 140 in the gravitational direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, when the solenoid 961 is driven, the blade portion 1896g can be arranged above the second winning opening 140, and the second winning opening can be positioned inside the through hole 966c1 of the displacement member 18966 when viewed from the rear. A mouth 140 opening can be positioned.

Further, when the displacement member 18966 is displaced in the direction of gravity due to the displacement of the transmission member 18958, the projection 945b slides inside the slide groove 18966a. When the projection 945b slides inside the sliding groove 18966a, the projection 945b first slides inside the non-transmitting portion 18966a6 and then slides inside the transmitting portion 18966a7. In this case, the extending direction of the non-transmitting portion 18966 and the displacement direction of the displacement member 18966 are set to be substantially the same. It slides inside the non-transmitting portion 18966a6 without being transmitted. On the other hand, when the projection 945b slides on the transmission portion 18966a7, it is pushed out and displaced (rotated) by the inner peripheral edge of the transmission portion 18966a7. As a result, the pair of feather members 945 are displaced to the open state.

Therefore, when the pair of feather members are in the open state, the game ball passing through the second winning hole 140 can be allowed to flow into the through hole 981c of the ball throwing unit 970 from the rolling portion 943a.

On the other hand, when the pair of feather members 945 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the protrusions 945b of the feather members 945 slide on the transmission portion 18966a7, and the feather members 945 are rotated. In this case, as described above, the displacement member 18966 has the blade portion 18966g arranged below the inner peripheral edge of the second prize winning port 140 in the gravitational direction, and the side surface on the front side is the protruding tip portion of the rolling portion 943a. Since it abuts against the protruding tip of the second ball throwing portion 942c, the second winning portion 942c is formed between the blade portion 18966g, the rolling portion 943a, and the second ball throwing portion 942c as it displaces downward in the direction of gravity. A biasing object inserted on the rolling path of the game ball from the mouth 140 can be cut off.

That is, when the displacement member 18966 is slidably displaced from the position to open the pair of feather members 945 to the position to close it, the displacement member 18966 traverses the path of the game ball flowing down from the second winning port 140, Since it has a blade portion 18966g that rubs against the edge of the passage (the end of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c), it is possible to prevent an illegal insertion from the second winning port 140 into the passage where the game ball is placed. Can cut forces.

For example, the tip of a thread is attached to a game ball, and the game ball is made to enter from the second winning hole 140, and is passed through the rolling part 943a to detect the passage of the game ball. ), the other end of the string is manipulated (pulled out, drawn) to cause the game ball to reciprocate, causing the detection device SE4 to detect it multiple times. With respect to such cheating, according to the eighteenth embodiment, even if the above-described game ball is entered in a state where the feather member 945 is opened, the displacement member 18966 is slid and when the blade portion 18966g traverses the path of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball feeding portion 942c, the intermediate portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the blade portion 18966g and rolls. 18966g and the rolling portion 943a or the second ball-throwing portion 942c when pressed against the edge of the portion 943a or the second ball-throwing portion 942c and in frictional contact with the edges of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball-throwing portion 942c. The thread can be cut between the edges of the As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 137, when the projections 945b of the pair of feather members 945 are cut (folded) by the player's fraudulent act, the through hole of the displacement member 18966 with respect to the second winning opening 140 966c1 is arranged on the lower side in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the player forcibly opens the pair of feather members 945 , the displacement member 18966 can restrict the flow of the game ball entered from the second winning hole 140 .

In this case, the transmission member 18965 is urged by the solenoid 961 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 94) so that the distal end portion 18965a is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. That is, the displacement member 18966 is urged in the direction to block the second winning opening 140 . Therefore, when the pair of feather members 945 are forcibly opened by the player's fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 18966 from being forcibly opened as well. As a result, cheating by the player can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the first and second embodiments described above, in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600, the substrate member 652 is provided with a total of four first blocks 653 and second blocks 654. However, this is not necessarily the case. The total number of the first blocks 653 and the second blocks 654 may be three or less, or may be five or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and the first block 653 alone or the second block 654 alone may be used.

In the first and second embodiments, the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652, and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface. Alternatively, the LED 651 , the first block 653 and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652 . In this case, the LED 651 is accommodated inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is made incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 .

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 of the projection unit 600 are made of a light transmissive material has been described. 630 and channel forming members 640, 2640 may be formed from two layers of light transmissive material and non-transmissive material.

For example, the rear portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of non-permeable material, and the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 and 2620 sides of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of non-permeable material. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of non-transmissive material can prevent light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . That is, light emitted by devices other than illumination unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transmissive material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the light from other devices It is possible to prevent light from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or pattern in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

Also, in this case, the layer formed of non-transmissive material is formed of a highly reflective metallic material or flexible material, or between the non-transmissive material layer and the transparent material layer. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material or a flexible material having a high reflectance. As a result, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the rear surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portions 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described. For example, the rear view 632 and the front part 642 are attached with a seal of a member (for example, silver foil, aluminum, etc.) having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, or a color with a high reflectance is attached. (For example, white etc.) may be printed.

In this case, it is possible to prevent light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by stickers or printing. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the light from other devices It is possible to prevent light from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying a pattern or pattern in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

Further, the seal or printing makes it easier to reflect the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 onto the projection plate members 620 and 2620 . As a result, the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and patterns and designs can be clearly highlighted.

When a seal is attached, the seal may be attached in such a manner that the seal protrudes from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portions 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 toward the outer edge. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the projected seal portion, so that the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily collected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 .

In the above-described third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620, a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided. May be interposed.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is certainly totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material with high reflectance, and can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (amount of light) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3. Patterns and patterns can be made to stand out clearly.

In addition, the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance can prevent light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate member 3620 . That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the plate member made of non-transmissive material with high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when no light is incident on the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate member 3620), light from other devices is projected onto the projection plate. It is possible to prevent patterns and designs from being incident on the member 3620 and displayed in front of the projection plate member 3620 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the coil spring is used as the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a leaf spring. It should be noted that examples of the mounting method include a manner in which the projections 852 and 823 are connected and mounted, or a manner in which the displacement member 850 is mounted between the rotation shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820 .

In the first embodiment, the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotated around the shaft hole 851 formed at one end. 850 may slide in a guide groove formed in front base 820 . In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (the direction of gravity), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be controlled as in the first embodiment. Since the motion can be an orthographic projection of uniform circular motion and the displacement speed can be varied, the displacement member 850 can be caused to perform interesting displacements.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light from the LED 651 is made incident from the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate Patterns and designs can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620. FIG.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is positioned so as not to face the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 2620, 3620, 6620, gear members 630, 3630 and groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640), and the light emitted from the LED The projection plate members 620 , 2620 , 3620 , 6620 , the gear members 630 , 3630 and the groove forming members 640 , 2640 , 3640 may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end surfaces thereof.

In this case, the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are irradiated with light emitted in a direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LEDs 651, while the irradiation surfaces of the LEDs 651 are obliquely irradiated. Part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used both as light for displaying patterns and patterns on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and for irradiating other objects to be irradiated.

In the first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 are arranged in parallel. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620 , 2620 , 3620 and 6620 .

Specifically, the projection plate members 620, 2620, and 3620 are arranged such that the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the rear side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged. , 6620 may be irradiated. In this case, when a pattern or pattern is displayed on the surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620, the light from the LEDs 651 leaks from the inner edges of the front bases 612 and 6612, which are annular in shape when viewed from the front. can be suppressed.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged facing the front side, and the light irradiated in the direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620. It may be a position where the side end surface is irradiated.

Furthermore, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the rear side or the front side, and is arranged in a state of being inclined with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. The position may be such that the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 are irradiated with the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of .

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed toward the back side or the front side and arranged in a state inclined with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is changed. The position may be such that the light irradiated in the direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated to the front portions 632 of the groove forming members 640 , 2640 , 3640 or the rear portions 632 of the gear members 630 , 3630 .

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is made incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is illuminated. Although the case of increasing the amount of emitted light has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620 may be different.

That is, by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 to divide the region of the reflection part 622 (for example, into three regions), the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is divided into three regions. The light incident from the section is emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the first area, and the light incident from the left side is emitted from the front side by the reflecting section 622 in the second area, and is emitted from the right side. The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 of the third region. Thereby, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns of patterns and designs to be displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to suppress the loss of interest of the player.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the object to be irradiated (projection plate member 5620) to irradiate the first to third regions (for example, The light source arranged on the left side emits light from the upper end to illuminate the first area, the light source arranged on the left side emits light from the left end surface to illuminate the second area, and the light source arranged on the right side emits light from the right edge. It is also possible to irradiate the third area by irradiating the light from the surface), but it is necessary to arrange a plurality of light sources for that, and there is a problem that the product cost increases.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, thereby Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, that is, the case of irradiating the second or third area and the case of irradiating the first area. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 to be arranged can be reduced accordingly, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed in accordance with the sliding displacement of the projection plate member 5620, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be rotated by connecting it to the shaft of a newly provided drive motor.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the light irradiation direction of the LEDs 651 arranged in front of the second block 654. It is possible to partially increase or decrease the amount of light emitted from the front of the . That is, by changing the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620, it is possible to change the display density of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, the plurality of irradiation units 650 for irradiating the projection plate member 620, and the gear for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 are placed between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. Although the case where the trains (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. Two or more of the plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be stacked in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying a pattern or a pattern on each of the projection plate members 620, the player can visually recognize the combination of the patterns and patterns displayed on each of the projection plate members 620.例文帳に追加As a result, by changing the rotation position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a display pattern of a plurality of patterns and designs, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being spoiled.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

In the above-described third embodiment, the light from the LED 651 does not enter the central side from the side edge of the projection plate member 3620 where the bolt T is arranged, but this is not necessarily the case. Alternatively, the bolt T may be made of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) so that the light projected on the side surface of the bolt T is reflected toward the center of the projection plate member 3620 . In this case, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 can be easily condensed on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620 .

In addition, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals to partially form a portion where no pattern or design is displayed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 (the light from the LEDs 651 is not incident). You may make it divide|segment a display.

In addition, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). A portion where no light is incident can be used as a ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646 , when light enters from the radially outer side of the opening 646 , the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light from the LED 651 does not enter the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from entering the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while the LED 651 provided in the irradiation unit 650 is emitting light, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is being displaced (rotated). .

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It can be anything.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. can be easily guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the protrusion 945b is formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the rear, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion 945b may be formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear. In this case, rattling of the feather member 945 during the opening/closing operation of the feather member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening/closing operation of the feather member 945 can be stabilized.

That is, when the protrusion 945b is formed to have an irregular shape when viewed from the rear or the slide groove 966a2 is formed to be curved, the protrusion 945b slides in the slide groove 966a2, thereby causing the inner wall of the slide groove 966a2 and the protrusion to slide. 945b changes. Therefore, when the gap between the inner wall of the slide groove 966a2 and the protrusion 945b is increased, the protrusion 945b is more likely to move by the amount of the gap, and the feather member 945 is more likely to rattle.

On the other hand, the protrusion 945b is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the rear, and the sliding groove 966a2 extends linearly in the displacement member 966, so that the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 and the inner wall of the sliding groove 966a2 when the blade member 945 is opened and closed. The gap with the projection 945b can always have a constant size. Therefore, rattling of the feather member 945 can be suppressed, and the opening and closing operation of the feather member 945 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, since the slide groove 966a2 extends linearly along the direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the displacement member 966, the extension length of the slide groove 966a2 can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of lightening that accompanies the recessing of the sliding groove 966a2, and to improve the rigidity of the displacement member 966. As shown in FIG.

In the seventh embodiment, the screw screwed into the annular projection 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other is for fastening and fixing the ball entry member 953 and the passage member 955. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the screw may be for fastening and fixing the specific winning hole unit 950 and the front unit 940 .

In the fifth and twelfth embodiments, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is projected from the body portion 961a by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pair of feather members 945 are closed, power may be applied to the body portion 961a so that the shaft portion 961b of the drive unit 960 is drawn inside the body portion.

In this case, the displacement members 11966 and 12966 are inserted into the rolling passage of the rolling game ball of the rolling portion 943a and the second ball throwing portion 942c by the blade portions 11968c and 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2. An illegal object (thread) can be cut using the electromagnetic force of the drive unit 960 (solenoid 610). That is, since the displacement of the blades 11968c, 6683 and the second blade 12966c2 in the cutting direction (pinching direction) is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut the illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

Further, in the fifth and twelfth embodiments, the coil spring SP1 is arranged in a compressed state between the main body portion 961a and the ring portion 961c of the drive unit 960, and electric power is applied (supplied) to the main body portion 961a. Thus, the ring portion 961c is displaced toward the main body portion 961a (the shaft portion 961b is pulled into the main body portion 961a), but this is not necessarily the case. For example, by disposing a spring in a stretched state between the main body portion 961a and the ring portion 961c of the drive unit 960 and applying electric power to the main body portion 961a, the ring portion 961c is separated from the main body portion 961a. You may displace in a direction.

In this case, similarly to the above, the displacement of the blades 11968c, 6683 and the second blade 12966c2 in the cutting direction (pinching direction) is performed using electromagnetic force, so that the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut the illegal object by the blade portions 11968c, 6683 and the second blade portion 12966c2.

In the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 11966 is formed from two members, the first member 11967 and the second member 11968, and the blade portion 11968c is formed in the second member 11968 having a larger displacement amount than the first member 11967. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The displacement member 11966 may be formed from one member, the amount of displacement of the one member (the displacement member 11966) by the transmission member 965 may be increased, and the blade portion 11968c may be formed in the through hole 966c1 of the one member.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 of the specific winning opening unit 950 is described as projecting in an annular shape, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, the annular protrusion 953c formed between the pair of detection devices SE1 facing each other may be formed in a conical shape that expands in diameter as it separates from the entrance member 953 toward the passage member 955 side.

In this case, in order to secure a crossroads from the specific prize winning opening 65a to the drive unit 960, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, etc., the traveling direction of the drill is set to the outer circumference of the annular protrusion 953c. Wiring HS3 can be easily damaged (disconnected) by laterally displacing (slipping) the surface (the outer peripheral surface of the enlarged diameter portion) (in a direction away from the axis of annular projection 953c in the radial direction).

In the above-described seventh embodiment, the game area (front) side of the front base 981 of the sorting unit 980 has been described as being visually recognized by the player. You may attach the seal|sticker which displays the information which consists of a character or a figure to the side.

In this case, on the game area (front) side of the ball throwing passage TR0, the first passage TR1, and the second passage TR2 of the sorting unit 980, information consisting of characters or graphics is displayed. ), the position of the sorting unit 980 can be easily recognized by the player using the display as a mark (reference position). The form of information display is not limited to attachment of a sticker, and printing with ink, two-color formation, or the like may be used.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Drive Unit 600 as an Example>
A ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance for opening or closing the ball entrance, and the pair of feather members. and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of blade members, wherein the transmission mechanism comprises the driving force of the driving means and a slide member that is slidably displaced with the rotation of the rotary member. A game machine A1 characterized in that a sliding groove into which a set portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the other of the slide member or the pair of feather members.

Here, a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a pair of feather members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance for opening or closing the ball entrance, and a pair of feather members for opening or closing the ball entrance A game machine is known that includes driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing members and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a pair of wing members (for example, JP-A-2010- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member that is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and one end of the rotating member is connected to a protruding portion that protrudes from the back surface of the pair of feather members. Specifically, on one end side of the rotating member, opposed portions are formed which face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction, and the projecting portion of the feather member is inserted between the opposed portions. Therefore, when the rotary member is rotated, the facing portion of the rotary member pushes up or pushes down the projecting portion of the wing member, thereby opening or closing the wing member.

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since it is necessary to set a large gap between the facing portion and the projecting portion, there is a problem that the opening and closing operation of the wing member is unstable. That is, when the rotary member is rotated for the opening and closing operation of the wing member, the position of the facing portion is inclined with respect to the projecting portion, and the facing distance between the facing portions is changed according to the outer shape (thickness) of the projecting portion. ), the projecting portion interferes between the opposing portions, making it impossible to rotate the rotating member. Therefore, it is necessary to set the facing distance between the facing parts to a size that does not interfere with the projecting part, and the gap between the facing part and the projecting part is increased accordingly. As a result, the wing members are likely to rattle, and the opening and closing operations of the wing members are not stable.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. A protruding portion protrudes from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members. The groove width of the groove can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the slide member is the sliding displacement, and the attitude of the sliding groove is not inclined with respect to the protruding portion, so there is no need to avoid interference with the protruding portion during rotation unlike the conventional product. Therefore, for example, the groove width of the sliding groove can be set equal to the size (thickness) of the projecting portion, so that the groove width can be suppressed, so that the gap between the sliding groove and the projecting portion can be reduced. . As a result, rattling of the wing members can be suppressed, and opening and closing operations of the wing members can be stabilized.

The sliding groove may be a recessed groove (dent) or a through groove (opening). In other words, the sliding groove should be formed so that the protruding portion inserted therein can slide along the extending direction of the sliding groove (the direction orthogonal to the direction of the groove width).

A game machine A2 in the game machine A1, characterized in that the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation shafts of the pair of feather members.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the pair of blade members, so that the slide member is positioned substantially with respect to the blade members. They can be arranged in parallel. As a result, the space required for arranging the blade member and the slide member can be reduced, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the projecting portion is projected from the feather member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and extends linearly along a direction perpendicular to the direction of slide displacement of the slide member. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being extended in a shape.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member and extended linearly. The gap between the inner wall of the sliding groove and the projecting portion can always be kept constant during the opening and closing operation of the blade member. Therefore, rattling of the wing members can be suppressed, and opening and closing operations of the wing members can be stabilized. Moreover, since the sliding groove extends linearly along the direction orthogonal to the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member, the length of extension of the sliding groove can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the amount of hollowing that accompanies the recessing of the slide groove, and to improve the rigidity of the slide member.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the projecting portion is projected from the feather member, the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member, and the slide member is slidably displaced upward in the direction of gravity. A game machine A4, wherein the position of the protruding portion when starting is set downward along the direction of gravity of the rotating shaft of the feather member.

Here, in contrast to the conventional product in which the rotary member is directly connected to the blade member, in the present invention, since the slide member is interposed between the blade member and the rotary member, the slide member is slid upward in the direction of gravity. At the time of movement, the weight of the slide member is added, and the inertial force increases, and the driving force required for the driving means increases. Therefore, it becomes difficult to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the blade members in the stopped state to open or close them.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the projecting portion is projected from the wing member, and the sliding groove is recessed in the slide member to slide. Since the position of the protruding portion when the member starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity is set below along the direction of gravity of the rotating shaft of the blade member, the protruding portion is pushed up by the inner wall of the slide groove. It is possible to increase the horizontal direction component and decrease (minimize) the gravitational direction component of the displacement component of the part. Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the wing members in the stopped state to open or close them.

In the game machine A4, the game machine A5 is characterized in that when the slide member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the feather member is rotated in a direction to be released.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, when the slide member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity, the wing member is rotated in the direction in which it is released, so that the wing member can be moved by its weight. It can be rotated by (self weight). Therefore, even in the present invention in which the weight of the slide member is added, it is possible to smoothly perform the initial operation when starting to drive the blade member in the stopped state (closed position) and opening it.

In the game machine A4 or A5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the protruding portion abuts when the sliding member starts to slide upward in the direction of gravity includes the rotating shaft of the feather member and the force of gravity. A gaming machine A6 characterized by forming an inclined surface inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to a direction.

According to the game machine A6, in either the game machine A4 or A5, the inner wall of the sliding groove with which the projecting portion abuts when the sliding member starts sliding displacement upward in the direction of gravity is provided with a feather member. Since an inclined surface is formed that is inclined with respect to a plane that includes the axis of rotation and is perpendicular to the direction of gravity, even if the position of the projection is set below the axis of rotation of the blade member in the direction of gravity. In addition, it is possible to smoothly start sliding displacement of the slide member upward in the direction of gravity by guiding the projecting portion along the direction of inclination of the inclined surface.

In addition, by forming the inclined surface on the inner wall of the slide groove, not only can the gap between the inner wall and the projecting portion be reduced accordingly, but also the contact of the projecting portion with the inclined surface can In addition to displacement of the installation portion in the direction of gravity, displacement in the horizontal direction can also be restricted. Therefore, rattling of the blade member in the open or closed stopped state can be easily suppressed. That is, even when affected by vibration accompanying the falling game ball, it is possible to easily maintain the wing member in the open or closed posture.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove is provided with a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the sliding member is slid to a position for closing the wing member, The game machine A7 is characterized in that rotation of the feather member is restricted in a state in which the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives the protruding portion when the slide member is slid to the position where the wing member is closed. In a state in which the receiving portion is recessed and the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

A game machine A8 characterized in that, in the game machine A7, the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion by sliding the sliding member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the slide member is slid downward in the direction of gravity so that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. ) can be used to facilitate maintenance of the state in which the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the rotary member includes a contact portion and a projecting portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the blade member. a one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side; a second abutted portion that is opposed to the wing member and is contacted by the other side of the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the wing member; is closed, one side of the abutting portion is abutted against the abutted portion on one side, the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member, and at least the abutted portion on the other side is connected to the The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that, when the rotary member is rotated to the other side to a position where the other side of the abutment portion abuts, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the rotary member has a contact portion and a projecting portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the blade member, and a direction of sliding displacement with the one-side abutted portion. and the other-side contacted portion that is opposed to and is contacted by the other side of the contact portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the feather member, When the rotary member is rotated to one side, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slidably displaced toward one side, thereby While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted portion is pushed by the other side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing members are released.

In this case, when the blade member is closed, one side of the abutting portion is abutted against the abutted portion on one side and the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member. The sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position where the other side of the contacting portion contacts the other side contacted portion, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released. By rotating the member further to the other side, the sliding member can be slidably displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In game machines A1 to A8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. A projecting portion projects from one of the wing members, and a sliding groove through which the projecting portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of wing members. The member has an abutment portion and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the abutment portion. a one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion is abutted, and a one-side abutted portion facing the one-side abutted portion at a predetermined distance in the direction of the slide displacement to open the feather member. a second abutted portion to which the other side of the abutting portion is abutted when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side, and when the feather member is closed, the projecting portion The slide member is slidably displaced from a state in which the blade member is disengaged from the slide member and the blade member is closed to a position where the one-side contact portion is in contact with one side of the contact portion. The game machine A10 is characterized in that, when the slide member is pressed, the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A8, the rotating member has a contact portion and a protruding portion that protrudes from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the blade member, and a direction of sliding displacement with the one-side abutted portion. and the other-side contacted portion that is opposed to and is contacted by the other side of the contact portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the feather member, When the rotary member is rotated to one side, the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slidably displaced toward one side, thereby While the member is closed, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the other side abutted portion is pushed by the other side of the abutting portion along with the rotation, and the slide member slides toward the other side. By being displaced, the wing members are released.

In this case, when the slide member is slidably displaced from a state in which the blade member is closed to a position where the one-side contact portion abuts against one side of the contact portion, the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the blade member is closed, the projecting portion is disengaged from the slide member. A wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang and the one-side abutting portion can allow the rotating member to rotate to the other side. It is necessary to form it into an appropriate shape, and the shape becomes complicated. Therefore, there is a possibility that not only the strength will be lowered, but also the engagement will be easily released. On the other hand, as in the present invention, when the blade member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion are rotated. The member need not be shaped to allow rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified and the strength can be ensured, but also a shape that facilitates holding the engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A10, in a state in which a passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the above-described A gaming machine A11, wherein a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A10, it is equipped with a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the protruding portion is not in contact with the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. The sliding member can regulate the falling game ball.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A11, a passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the slide member slides from a position to open the feather member to a position to close it. A game machine A12, characterized by comprising a rubbing portion that traverses the passage of the passage member and rubs against an edge portion of the passage member when the member is slidably displaced.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, when the slide member is slidably displaced from the position to open the wing member to the position to close it, the passage of the passage member is crossed and the passage member Since the slide member has a friction contact portion that rubs against the edge of the ball, it is possible to cut off an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage through the ball entrance.

For example, the tip of the string is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the string There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by operating (pulling out, attracting) to reciprocate the game ball. According to the present invention, against such a fraudulent act, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing members opened, the slide member is slidably displaced from the position where the wing members are opened to the position where the wing members are closed, When the frictional contact portion traverses the passage of the passage member, the midway portion of the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the frictional contact portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and the frictional contact portion crosses the passage member. When rubbed against the edge, the thread can be cut between the rubbed portion and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

In addition, it is preferable to form the friction contact portion of the slide member from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion (rubbing contact portion) of the slide member may be made of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion of the passage member (the portion where the friction contact portion is in friction contact) may be made of a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the friction contact portion and the portion (the edge of the passage member) with which the friction contact portion is in friction contact are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, a passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the transmission mechanism is displaced from a position in which the feather member is opened to a position in which it is closed. A gaming machine A13 characterized by comprising a pair of cutting members that traverse the passage of the passage member and rub their edges against each other when cutting.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A11, when the wing members are displaced from the open position to the closed position, they cross the passage of the passage member and the edges of each other. Since the transmission mechanism is provided with a pair of cutting members that are in frictional contact with each other, it is possible to cut an illegal object that has been illegally inserted into the passage through the ball entrance.

For example, the tip of the string is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the other end of the string There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by operating (pulling out, attracting) to reciprocate the game ball. According to the present invention, against such fraud, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing members opened, the wing members are displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the pair of cutting members When the string crosses the passage of the passage member, the midway portion of the string, the tip of which is adhered to the game ball, can be sandwiched between the pair of cutting members and cut. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

Note that the pair of cutting members is preferably made of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that are in frictional contact with each other) may be made of a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in frictional contact with each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the gaming machine A12 or A13, the driving means displaces the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force and displaces the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The blade member is formed as a solenoid actuator operated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the blade member from the open position to the closed position is carried out by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A gaming machine A14 characterized by:

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of the game machine A12 or A13, the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut off an illegal object (for example, a string) between the friction contact portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A14, the rotating member has an abutment portion, and the slide member is adapted to contact the abutment when the rotating member is rotated toward one side to close the wing member. A one-side contacted portion with which one side of the contact portion abuts; A game characterized in that the other side of the contact portion is contacted by the other side contact portion, and the one side contact portion and the other side contact portion are formed substantially at the center in the width direction. Machine A15.

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 to A14, the rotary member has an abutting portion, and the slide member is rotated to close the blade member when the rotary member is rotated to one side. When the rotating member is rotated toward the other side in order to open the one side contacted part and the one side contacted part that is opposed to the one side contacted part and to open the feather member The other side of the abutting portion is provided with the other side abutted portion, and the one side abutted portion and the other side abutted portion are formed substantially at the center in the width direction. It is possible to easily allow the attitude change of the slide member between itself and the member. Therefore, the slide member can be smoothly slid along with the rotation of the rotating member, and as a result, the wing member can be reliably opened or closed.

That is, when the load from the game ball is applied to only one of the pair of feather members during the operation of opening or closing the pair of feather members by slidingly displacing the slide member with the rotation of the rotating member, When the posture of the slide member is changed, if the slide member is connected to the pair of blade members at two points and is also connected to the rotation member at two points, the pair of blade members and the rotation member rotate. It is difficult to allow a change in the posture of the slide member with respect to the member, and resistance is generated when the slide member is slidably displaced (that is, the rotating member is rotated), and the opening or closing of the wing member is hindered. . On the other hand, according to the present invention, the slide member is connected to the pair of blade members at two points and is connected to the rotating member at one point. Even if the load from the game ball is applied only to one side, it is possible to easily allow the attitude change of the slide member between the pair of feather members and the rotary member.

The approximate center in the width direction where the one-side contacted portion and the other-side contacted portion are formed passes through the approximate center between the pair of projecting portions in the state where the pair of feather members are opened or closed. , and a position on an imaginary line along the direction of slide displacement.

A gaming machine A16 characterized in that the width dimension of one side and the other side of said abutting portion is set at least three times or less as large as the maximum external dimension of said projecting portion in said gaming machine A15.

According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A15, the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be at least three times or less than the maximum outer dimension of the projecting portion. It is possible to easily allow the attitude change of the slide member between the blade member and the rotating member. In addition, it is preferable that the width dimension of one side and the other side of the contact portion is set to be twice or less the maximum outer dimension of the projecting portion. This is because it is possible to more easily achieve the above-described tolerance of posture change.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the winning port unit 930 as an example>
A first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and the second ball entrance In a game machine comprising a second opening/closing member for opening or closing a mouth and second driving means for driving the second opening/closing member, the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged to drive the second opening/closing member. A gaming machine B1 characterized by being arranged on the back side.

Here, the first ball entrance, the first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, the first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, the second ball entrance, the first A gaming machine is known that includes a second opening/closing member that opens or closes two ball entrances and a second driving means that drives the second opening/closing member (eg, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177416). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the first drive means and the second drive means are arranged behind the first opening and closing member and the second opening and closing member, respectively. There is a problem that it is difficult to arrange other members and devices on the back side of the device, and it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the first driving means and the second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening/closing member, Space can be formed. That is, by concentrating the installation space for the first drive means and the second drive means on the back side of the second opening/closing member, the space for arranging other members and devices can be allocated to the first opening/closing member (first input). It can be secured on the back of the ball mouth), and the space can be used effectively.

A game machine B2, wherein the front projection area of the second opening/closing member is larger than the front projection area of the first opening/closing member in the game machine B1.

A gaming machine B3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than the total front projected area of the first driving means and the second driving means.

According to the game machine B2 or B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the front projection area of the second opening/closing member is made larger than the front projection area of the first opening/closing member, or the first drive means and the second driving means, the dead space behind the second entrance (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine B3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as a longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are positioned on the back side of the second ball entrance to the second opening/closing member. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the opening/closing member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the second opening/closing member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view with one direction as the longitudinal direction, and the first driving means and the second driving means are the second ball entering. Since they are arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second opening/closing member on the back side of the opening, the dead space on the back side of the second entrance (second opening/closing member) can be effectively utilized.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the first driving means and the second driving means comprise a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and driving the drive shaft and driving the main body. and a wiring that supplies power to the driving portion and is pulled out from the other side of the main body portion, wherein the first driving means and the second driving means connect the driving shaft to the second driving means. A gaming machine B5 characterized in that it is arranged in a posture directed toward an opening/closing member.

According to the game machine B5, in any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the first driving means and the second driving means comprise a main body, a drive shaft arranged on one side of the main body, and a drive shaft of the main body. and a wiring that supplies electric power to the driving unit and is drawn out from the other side of the main unit. Since it is disposed in a posture directed toward the opening and closing member 2, the wiring of the first driving means and the wiring of the second driving means can be easily put together.

In the game machine B5, the body portion of the first drive means and the body portion of the second drive means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the drive shaft and the wiring of the outer surface of the body portion are arranged. A game machine B6 characterized in that the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at positions where one outer surface is substantially flush with the other.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the body portion of the first driving means and the body portion of the second driving means are each formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the driving portion of the outer surface of the body portion Since the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at a position where the outer surfaces except for the outer surfaces on which the shaft and wiring are disposed are substantially flush with each other, for example, the first driving means and the second driving means have different outputs and the main body portions of the two have different sizes, the shape of the shield plate for partitioning the first driving means and the second driving means from other areas can be simplified.

That is, when the body portion of the first drive means and the body portion of the second drive means are formed to have different sizes, the outer surfaces of one body portion and the other body portion form a step. It becomes necessary to form a shield plate by bending along the step, and the shape of the shield plate becomes complicated. In contrast, according to the present invention, the first driving means and the second driving means are disposed at a position where one outer surface of the main body portion is substantially flush with each other, and the outer surfaces do not form a step, so that the shield plate can be made into a flat plate shape. As a result, the shape of the shield plate can be simplified.

The shield plate divides the arrangement area of the first drive means and the second drive means from other areas (for example, the area where the detection sensor and the control board are arranged), and divides the two areas. is a conductive barrier for restricting (suppressing) the flow of an electromagnetic field, and is formed, for example, as a metal plate.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B6, a first passage member forming a passage for game balls entered into the first ball entrance and a passage for game balls entered into the second entrance and a first transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the first driving means to the first opening/closing member, wherein the first opening/closing member rotates to a position sandwiching the ball inlet. The first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first driving means, and the first passage member and the second passage are rotated by the driving force of the first driving means. A game machine B7 comprising: a rotating member disposed between members; and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of feather members.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the first transmission mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the first drive means and is rotated between the first passage member and the second passage member. and a sliding member that is slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of blade members. As a result, a space can be secured on both sides (sides) of the first passage member on the back side of the first ball entrance. In addition, since it is not necessary to bend the first passage member toward the second passage side in order to avoid interference with the rotating member as in the conventional product, the first ball inlet can be brought closer to the second ball inlet. can be done.

In the game machine B7, the rotating member includes a first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and a second portion extending from the rotating shaft and driven by the first driving means. A gaming machine B8, wherein the first portion is formed by bending in a substantially V-shape when viewed in the rotation axis direction.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effects of the game machine B7, the rotating member includes the first portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member, and the first driving portion extending from the rotating shaft and connected to the slide member. and the second portion driven by the means, and the first portion is bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. The distance to the slide member can be suppressed.

That is, the first portion is formed linearly, and the length dimension of the first portion (the distance from the rotating shaft to the portion connected to the slide member) is the distance from the rotating shaft to the slide member in the present invention. If the distance is set to be the same as the linear distance to the part where the slide member slides, the slide amount of the slide member can be made the same as in the present invention, but the distance between the first driving means and the slide member increases, and the entire size increases. . On the other hand, when the first portion is formed linearly and the length dimension of the first portion is set shorter than the linear distance from the rotation shaft to the portion connected to the slide member in the present invention, the first Although the distance between the driving means and the slide member can be made equivalent to that of the present invention, the sliding amount of the slide member is reduced.

In contrast, according to the present invention, the first portion is formed to be bent in a substantially V-shape when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis. The distance between members can be suppressed.

A gaming machine B9, wherein the second portion of the rotating member is formed on the back side of the first portion opposite to the sliding member in the gaming machine B8.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of the game machine B8, the second portion of the rotary member is formed on the back side of the first portion opposite to the slide member, so that the first portion is bent. The resulting space can be effectively used to reduce the size of the rotating member. That is, it is possible to efficiently arrange the rotary member in the space between the first passage member and the second passage member, and to reduce the overall size.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B9, a detection sensor is provided for detecting a game ball entering the second ball entrance, and at least part of the detection sensor is connected to the second opening/closing member and the first driving means. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that it is disposed between.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B9, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball entering the second ball entrance is provided, and at least a part of the detection sensor performs the second opening/closing. Since it is arranged between the member and the first driving means, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened and the first driving means is tampered with through the second ball entrance, a portion of the detection sensor detects the first driving means. Such cheating can be made more difficult because the driving means can be hidden.

In this case, if a tool such as a drill is used to secure a path from the second entrance to the first driving means, the detection sensor may be destroyed. Therefore, by monitoring the state of such a detection sensor, fraud can be detected. In addition, in the present invention in which the first driving means is arranged on the back side of the second opening/closing member, even if the second opening/closing member is opened and the first driving means is tampered with through the second entrance, By closing the second opening/closing member, the first driving means is shielded by the second opening/closing member, and the part where the fraud is applied becomes invisible, so that the fraud can be detected by monitoring the state of the detection sensor described above. is particularly effective.

The gaming machine B10 includes a case member that houses the detection sensor, and a screw member that is fastened to the case member. is disposed between the second opening/closing member and the first driving means, and the screw member is positioned between the pair of sensor devices facing each other.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects of the game machine B10, at least a part of each of the pair of detection sensors is arranged between the second opening/closing member and the first drive means and fastened to the case member. Since the screw member is positioned between the pair of sensor devices facing each other, when the second opening/closing member is opened and the first driving means is tampered with through the second ball entrance, the first driving means can be hidden by the screw member. Therefore, it is possible to make such fraudulent acts more difficult. That is, it is difficult to shield the entire front surface of the first driving means with the pair of detection sensors, and a gap is likely to be formed between the pair of detection sensors. is the tightening position of the screw member, the unshielded area in front of the first drive means can be compensated for by the screw member, making fraud more difficult.

The screw member may be used to fasten and fix the two members of the case member, or may be used to fasten and fix another member to the case member. good. Moreover, it is preferable that the screw member is made of metal.

A game machine B12 characterized in that, in the game machine B11, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is positioned between the pair of detection sensors facing each other.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B11, since the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is positioned between the pair of detection sensors facing each other, for example, the second opening/closing member is opened to enable the second input. When the first driving means is tampered with through the ball mouth, such tampering can be made more difficult.

That is, the wiring is relatively susceptible to damage. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second entrance to the first driving means, for example, if a tool such as a drill is used to drill a hole, the wiring may be damaged due to the fraudulent act. (Disconnection) can be made easier. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize that it is difficult to cheat without damaging (disconnecting) the wiring, thereby making it easier to deter cheating.

A gaming machine B13 in the gaming machine B12, wherein the case member has a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and wiring of the pair of detection sensors is wound around the seat portion.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B12, the case member has a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the wires of the pair of detection sensors are wound around the seat portion. , can be routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the first drive means. That is, a wider area in front of the first drive means can be shielded by the wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first driving means through the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

In game machine B12 or B13, the case member has a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and is formed in a conical shape whose diameter increases as the seat portion is separated from the second opening/closing member. game machine B14.

According to the game machine B14, in addition to the effects of the game machine B12 or B13, the case member has a seat portion to which the screw member is fastened, and the seat portion has a conical shape that expands in diameter as it separates from the second opening and closing member. Therefore, in order to secure a path from the second ball entrance to the first driving means, for example, when a tool such as a drill is used to perform drilling, etc., the traveling direction of the drill is set to the seat portion. The wiring can be easily damaged (disconnected) by lateral displacement (slide) on the outer peripheral surface of the .

A gaming machine B15 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines B12 to B14, wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to a side opposite to a fastening position of the screw member.

According to the game machine B15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B12 to B14, the wiring of the pair of detection sensors is pulled out to the side opposite to the fastening position of the screw member. can be routed (positioned) over a wider range in front of the That is, a wider area in front of the first driving means can be shielded by the screw member and wiring. Therefore, for example, when the second opening/closing member is opened to tamper with the first driving means through the second ball entrance, such tampering can be made more difficult.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention, Taking the Winning Hole Unit 930 and the Ball Throwing Unit 970 as Examples>
A game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which game balls pass, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member, and a second member arranged on the back side of the game board, wherein the first engaging portion engages with the first member and the second engaging portion engages with the second member. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising a third member having and.

Here, a game board, a first member disposed on the front side of the game board and having a first passage through which game balls pass, and a second passage communicating with the first passage of the first member and a second member disposed on the back side of the game board is known (for example, JP-A-2012-5783). After flowing down the front side of the game board and flowing into the first passage of the first member, the game ball flows into the second passage of the second member after passing through the first passage, and flows into the second passage of the second member on the back side of the game board. Go through 2 passages. As a result, the passage path of the game ball is changed in the front-rear direction, and the player can be entertained.

In this case, if there is a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, smooth downflow of the game ball is hindered, so the positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member is ensured. are requested to do so. However, the game machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to position the second member with respect to the first member. That is, since not only the first member but also various members such as other members having passages and decorative members are arranged on the front surface of the game board, positioning holes for positioning each of these members are provided on the game board. While the positioning hole for positioning the first member can also be formed in the process of forming the second member, in order to form the positioning hole for positioning the second member on the back of the game board, the game board is turned over A separate step of forming a positioning hole only for the second member is required, which is not realistic.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the third member having the first engaging portion that engages with the first member and the second engaging portion that engages with the second member is provided. can be used to position the second member relative to the first member.

In the game machine C1, the game board is provided with an opening formed with an opening, and a connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is provided in the internal space. A game machine C2 characterized in that the third member is arranged in an internal space of a part.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the game board is formed with an opening, and the connecting portion between the first passage of the first member and the second passage of the second member is arranged in the internal space. and the third member is arranged in the inner space of the opening, there is no need to separately provide an opening for arranging the third member. That is, since the opening for arranging the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage is also used as a space for arranging the third member, the number of processing steps is reduced accordingly, and the product cost is reduced. can be planned.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the third member has the first engaging portion engaged with the first passage of the first member and the second engaging portion engaged with the second passage of the second member. A game machine C3, characterized in that

According to the game machine C3, in the game machine C1 or C2, the third member has the first engaging portion in the first passage of the first member and the second engaging portion in the second passage of the second member. The engagement allows effective positioning of the second member with respect to the first member. That is, the purpose of positioning the second member with respect to the first member is to suppress the occurrence of positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage. Since the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage) can be directly positioned by the third member, occurrence of positional deviation (step) can be effectively prevented compared to the case where other portions are positioned by the third portion. can be suppressed to As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

A gaming machine C4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C3, a part of an inner wall of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed of the third member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, since a part of the inner wall of at least one of the first passage and the second passage is formed by the third member, the dimensions of the first passage and the second passage are reduced. Tolerances or mounting tolerances can be more easily tolerated.

A gaming machine C5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed so as to be capable of holding the third member.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C4, the first member is formed so as to be able to hold the third member. When attaching each member, it is not necessary to separately attach the third member, and by attaching the first member, the third member can be attached at the same time. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine C5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, a first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. .

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5, in a state where the third member is held by the first member, the first engaging portion of the third member is engaged with the first member. After the first member and the third member are attached to the game board, there is no need to separately engage the first engaging portion of the third member with the first member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In the game machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member is formed to be engageable with the second member from the side opposite to the first member. A gaming machine C7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, when the third member is held by the first member, the second engaging portion of the third member engages the second member from the side opposite to the first member. By attaching the second member to the back surface of the game board after attaching the first member and the third member to the game board at the same time, simultaneously with the attachment operation, the third member can be engaged with the third member. The two engaging portions can be engaged with the second member. Therefore, the workability of the mounting work can be improved accordingly.

In any one of game machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged, and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member, and the fixing member is provided with the third A gaming machine C8 characterized in that the members are fixed or integrally formed.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C5 to C7, the first member includes a main body member in which the first passage is arranged and a fixing member fastened and fixed to the main body member. In addition, since the third member is fixed to or integrally formed with the fixing member, the third member can be held (arranged) on the first member at the same time as the fixing member is fastened and fixed to the main body member. . As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the third member when attaching the first member and the second member to the game board.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C8, the first member rotates to a position sandwiching a ball entrance formed so that a game ball can enter and communicated with the first passage, and the ball entrance. A pair of blade members that are pivotally supported to open or close the entrance, a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the pair of blade members, and a driving force of the driving means for applying the driving force to the pair of blades. a transmission mechanism for transmitting power to a member, the transmission mechanism comprising a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a sliding member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates to open and close the pair of blade members. and wherein the sliding displacement of the sliding member can be guided by the third member.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C8, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pair of rotating members slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. Since it is provided with a slide member for opening and closing the blade members, compared to the conventional product in which the opening and closing of the pair of blade members is performed only by a rotating member, the back side of the entrance and both sides (sides) of the first passage space can be reserved for In this case, since the third member can guide the sliding displacement of the sliding member, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for guiding the sliding displacement of the sliding member. Therefore, the structure of the first member can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine C9, the pair of feather members has a protruding portion protruding toward the slide member, and the slide member has a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted, A gaming machine C10, wherein the third member has a covering surface portion facing an opening of the sliding groove of the slide member on the side opposite to the feather member.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of the game machine C9, the pair of wing members are provided with projecting portions projecting toward the slide member, and the projecting portions are slidably inserted through the slides. The sliding member has the moving groove, and the third member has the covering surface facing the opening of the sliding groove on the opposite side of the blade member, so that the covering surface of the third member allows the slide member to slide. By shielding the opening of the groove from the outside, it is possible to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering the sliding groove. As a result, it is possible to stably open or close the pair of blade members by suppressing the hindrance of the sliding of the projecting portion due to dust or foreign matter that has entered the sliding groove.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the specific winning port unit 950 as an example>
A ball entrance formed so that a game ball can be entered, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, a rolling surface on which the game ball entered into the ball entrance rolls, and its rolling. A gaming machine D1 is a gaming machine comprising a passage member into which game balls rolling on a surface flow, wherein a plurality of said passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals.

The game ball includes a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, an opening/closing member for opening and closing the ball entrance, and a passage member forming a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance. A game machine is known (for example, JP-A-2015-3092). The ball entrance is formed in a size that allows a plurality of game balls to enter at the same time, and the game balls entered into the ball entrance are collected in the passage member by rolling on the rolling surface, and are collected in the passage member. One ball at a time is flowed into. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the ball entrance is made larger, the rolling distance (rolling surface length) of the game ball from the end of the ball entrance to the passage member becomes longer accordingly. Therefore, it takes time to reach the passage member, and another game ball is entered from the ball entrance before the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, which tends to cause over-winning. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since a plurality of passage members are arranged at predetermined intervals, even if the ball entrance is enlarged, the rolling distance (rolling surface) of the game ball to the passage member is reduced. length) can be shortened. Therefore, the time required to reach the passage member can be shortened, and the liquid can be made to flow into the passage member quickly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The gaming machine D1 is equipped with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the detection sensor is arranged at a connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, a detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided, and the detection sensor is arranged at the connecting portion between the rolling surface and the passage member. Therefore, the game ball entering the ball entrance can be detected more quickly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress entry of another game ball until the opening/closing member closes the ball entry port, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes a first guide means having a first inclined surface inclined from the ball entrance to the passage member and formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface. , the ball entrance is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the ball entrance, and the first guide means is formed at one end in the longitudinal direction of the ball entrance. and the passage member.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, the first inclined surface is inclined from the ball entrance toward the passage member and is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface. The entrance is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape and the rolling surface extends along the longitudinal direction of the entrance. Since it is disposed between the side end and the passage member, when a game ball enters from near the longitudinal end of the ball entrance, the game ball is pushed by the first inclined surface of the first guide means. Guided to the passage member, it is possible to make it difficult to stay on the longitudinal end of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball entered from the ball entrance can be quickly made to flow into the passage member, and as a result, entry of another game ball is suppressed until the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. By doing so, it is possible to suppress over-winning.

A game machine D4 in any one of the game machines D1 to D3, wherein the game machine D4 is characterized by comprising a guide groove which is recessed in the rolling surface and which is formed as a concave groove inclined downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member. .

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove inclined downward from the ball entrance to the passage member. Therefore, the rolling surface can receive the game ball rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface and guide it to the passage member. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the passage member when rolling in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Therefore, the game ball entered from the ball entrance can be quickly made to flow into the passage member, and as a result, entry of another game ball is suppressed until the ball entrance is closed by the opening/closing member. By doing so, it is possible to suppress over-winning.

A game machine D5 in the game machine D4, characterized in that the guide groove extends linearly in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, since the guide grooves are linearly extended in a direction substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, A game ball rolling in a direction can be easily received in the guide groove, and the received game ball can be rapidly guided (flowed) into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A game machine D5, wherein the groove width of the guide groove is set substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball in the game machine D4 or D5.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4 or D5, the groove width of the guide groove is set substantially equal to the diameter of the game ball, so when a plurality of game balls are received in the guide groove, The game balls can be guided to the passage member in an aligned state. Therefore, each game ball can be quickly made to flow into the passage member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In any one of the game machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is on the opposite side of the first region in which the first guide means is disposed, with the passage member interposed in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. A gaming machine D7 characterized in that the second area is formed so as to slope downward toward the first area.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D3 to D6, the rolling surface is provided with a passage member extending in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with respect to the first region where the first guide means is arranged. Since the second region, which is the opposite side across the can be quickly rolled toward the passage member by utilizing the downward slope of the second region. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

A game machine D7 is characterized by comprising second guide means protruding from the second region of the rolling surface in the game machine D7.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of the game machine D7, since the second guide means protruded from the second region of the rolling surface is provided, the rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second region. A game ball can be decelerated in front of a passage member. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second region to the first region through the passage member by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (immediately) the passage member. . Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the gaming machine D7 or D8, a game provided in the second region of the rolling surface and rolled along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface toward the passage member on the second region of the rolling surface The game machine D9 is characterized by comprising a second guide means capable of guiding a ball to the ball entrance side.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7 or D8, it is arranged in the second region of the rolling surface, and extends the second region of the rolling surface toward the passage member in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Since the second guide means is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball rolling along the passage toward the ball entrance side, the game ball whose rolling speed is increased by the downward inclination of the second area can be placed in front of the passage member. can be slowed down. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from rolling from the second region to the first region through the passage member by increasing the rolling speed up to the passage member and decelerating it before (immediately) the passage member. . Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

The game machine D10 is characterized in that, in the game machine D9, the opening/closing member is disposed at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can come into contact when the ball entrance is opened.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effects of the game machine D9, the opening/closing member is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the rolling surface can contact when the ball entrance is open. The game ball guided to the ball entrance side by the second guide means can be brought into contact with the opening/closing member and bounced back toward the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member faster. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the game machine D9 or D10, the second guide means is inclined in a direction away from the ball entrance as the side edge portion opposite to the first guide means is spaced away from the first guide means, A game machine D11 characterized in that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward toward the side portion opposite to the first guide means.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effects of the game machine D9 or D10, the second guide means is separated from the ball entrance as the side edge on the side opposite to the first guide means is separated from the first guide means. direction and its upper surface is inclined downward toward the side edge on the side opposite to the first guide means, so that the game ball quickly flows into the passage member while preventing it from jumping out of the entrance. can be made

That is, among the game balls rolling along the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface with the second region facing the passage member, the game balls with a relatively low (slow) rolling speed are fed from the ball entrance. Since there is little risk of it jumping out to the outside, it can be prevented from rolling from the second area to the first area through the passage member by contacting the side edge of the second guide means and guiding it toward the entrance side. By suppressing the flow, the flow into the passage member can be accelerated accordingly. On the other hand, a game ball with a relatively high (fast) rolling speed can be guided to the first region (first guide means) by passing over the upper surface of the second guide means. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the game ball is consumed by the overriding of the second guide means and the collision with the first guide member, and the speed can be reliably decelerated. Therefore, it is possible to quickly flow the liquid into the passage member while suppressing the liquid from jumping out of the entrance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of another game ball until the opening and closing member closes the ball entrance, thereby suppressing over-winning.

In the gaming machine D11, the second guide means has a side edge facing the first guide means extending in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface, and extending in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. The dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the orthogonal direction is larger than the dimension of the side edge of the second guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface. Game machine D12.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11, the dimension of the side edge of the first guide means in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface is Since the dimension of the side edge part of the second guide means is made larger than the size of the side edge part, the game ball which has climbed over the upper surface of the second guide means can be brought into contact (collision) with the first guide means to be surely decelerated. At the same time, it can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

In the gaming machine D11 or D12, the gaming machine D13 is characterized in that a position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball is included in the side edge portion of the second guide means.

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D11 or D12, since the side edge portion of the second guide means includes the position spaced apart from the rolling surface by the radius of the game ball, the upper surface of the second guide means The game ball that has crossed over is brought into contact with (collides with) the side edge of the first guide means, and can be reliably decelerated and easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

A game machine D14 characterized in that in any one of the game machines D8 to D13, the second guide means is positioned on an extension of the first inclined surface of the first guide means in the direction of inclination.

According to the game machine D14, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D8 to D13, the second guide means is positioned on the extension of the first inclined surface of the first guide means in the direction of inclination, so the first guide means Even if the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface is relatively high (fast), the game ball is brought into contact with (collides with) the second guide means. , can be decelerated and can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

In the game machine D14, a guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove that slopes downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the second guide means is guided from the bottom surface of the guide groove. A game machine D15 characterized in that the height dimension to the top is made larger than the radius of the game ball.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effects of the game machine D14, the guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove that is inclined downward from the ball entrance toward the passage member, and the bottom surface of the guide groove is provided. to the top of the second guide means is larger than the radius of the game ball, the rolling speed of the game ball guided toward the passage member by the first inclined surface of the first guide means is When relatively high (fast), the game ball can easily abut (collide) with the second guide means. Therefore, such a game ball can be decelerated, can be easily positioned in the vicinity of the passage member, and can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D15, a guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove that slopes downward from the ball entrance to the passage member, and the groove width of the guide groove is A game machine D16 characterized in that the size of the game machine D16 is reduced toward the passage member.

According to the game machine D16, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D15, a guide groove is provided in the rolling surface and is formed as a concave groove that slopes downward from the ball entrance to the passage member. Since the groove width of the guide groove becomes smaller toward the passage member, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface in the longitudinal direction of the rolling surface comes into contact with (collides with) the side wall of the guide groove. To easily change the rolling direction of a game ball to the direction toward a passage member. Therefore, the game ball can be made to flow into the passage member quickly.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention, Taking the Winning Hole Unit 930 and the Ball Throwing Unit 970 as Examples>
A game machine comprising a ball entry unit having a ball entry opening formed so that a game ball can be entered and a passage connected to the ball entry opening, and a game board on which the ball entry unit is arranged, An opening is formed in the game board in the board thickness direction, and the ball-entering unit has the ball-entering hole and a first passage connected to the ball-entering hole, and is arranged on the front side of the game board. and a second unit disposed on the back side of the first unit through the opening of the game board and having a second passage connected to the first passage. A gaming machine E1 characterized by:

Here, a game comprising a ball-entering unit provided with a ball-entering opening formed so that a game ball can enter and a passage connected to the ball-entering opening, and a game board on which the ball-entering unit is arranged machine is known (for example, JP-A-2015-131046). According to such a gaming machine, by replacing the ball-entering unit with another ball-entering unit (for example, one having a different number of passages), it is possible to change the specifications of the gaming machine while diverting (combining) the game board. can. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the ball-entering unit is arranged in front of the game board, it is necessary to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages in advance in front of the game board. Therefore, when using a ball-entering unit with a small number of passages, there is a problem that the space on the front side of the game board is wasted.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the ball-entering unit has a ball-entering opening and a first passage connected to the ball-entering opening, and is disposed on the front side of the game board. 1 unit and a second unit having a second passage connected to the first passage and disposed through the opening of the game board on the back side of the first unit. It is sufficient to secure a space corresponding to the size of the first unit, and there is no need to secure a space corresponding to the maximum number of passages (second passages) in front of the game board. Therefore, by replacing the second unit with another second unit (for example, one having a different number of second passages), the game board can be diverted (commonly used), and when the specifications of the game board are changed, the game board can be changed. The space in front of the can be effectively utilized.

In the gaming machine E1, at least part of the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, and the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and is similar to the first unit when viewed from the front. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being arranged in an overlapping position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, the second unit is formed to have a smaller external shape than the first unit, and is larger than the first unit when viewed from the front. Since the second unit is arranged at a position overlapping one unit, the second unit can be visually recognized by the player through the first unit, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced. In addition, in order to make the second unit visible to the player, it is not essential to form the game board from a light-transmitting material. Since it is permitted to attach or paint the game board, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the game machine E2, the game machine E3 is characterized in that at least the front side of the second unit in the second passage is made of a light transmissive material.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, since at least the front side of the second passage of the second unit is made of a light-transmitting material, the light flows down the second passage of the second unit through the first unit. The player can visually recognize the game ball to be played, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Note that the first unit may be entirely made of a light transmissive material. Moreover, when only part of the first unit is made of a light-transmitting material, it is preferable that at least a portion of the second unit overlapping the second passage in a front view is made of a light-transmitting material. This is because it is possible to visually recognize the flow of the game ball, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the first unit is made of a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is made of a colored light-transmitting material in the gaming machine E3.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, since the first unit is made of a colorless light-transmitting material and the second unit is made of a colored light-transmitting material, When the player visually recognizes the second unit, the player can easily grasp the positional relationship in the front-rear direction between the first unit and the second unit. In other words, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball flows down while changing its position in the front-rear direction, so that the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

A game machine E5 in the game machine E4 is characterized in that information consisting of characters or graphics is displayed in front of the second path of the second unit.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, information consisting of characters or figures is displayed in front of the second path of the second unit, so that the second unit can be viewed through the first unit. Even in this case, the player can easily recognize the position of the second passage (position in the front-rear direction) by using the display as a mark (reference position). In addition, examples of display mode include printing with ink, pasting of a sticker, and two-color molding.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the second passage includes a second upstream passage connected to the first passage and a plurality of second branch passages branched from the second upstream passage. and a plurality of second connection passages respectively connected to the plurality of second branch passages, wherein the second unit is disposed on the back side of the first unit and connected to the second upstream passage and a second upstream unit in which the plurality of second branch passages are formed, and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and in which the plurality of second connection passages are formed, A gaming machine E6 characterized in that a detection sensor for detecting passage of a game ball is arranged in a plurality of second branch passages.

According to the game machine E6, in any one of the game machines E1 to E5, the second unit is arranged on the back side of the first unit, and a second upstream passage and a plurality of second branch passages are formed. and a second downstream unit disposed in the second upstream unit and formed with a plurality of second connecting passages, and detecting passage of game balls through the plurality of second branch passages. Since the detection sensors are arranged, for example, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit having a smaller number of second branch passages to manufacture a game machine with different specifications, the number of the detection sensors arranged can be reduced. Workers' mistakes can be suppressed.

That is, in the structure in which the detection sensors are arranged in the second connecting passages, the number of detecting sensors corresponding to the number of the second connecting passages can be arranged. When changing to another unit that connects the first passage and the second connecting passage with only one passage, it is sufficient to dispose one detection sensor, but only the number of the second connecting passages. There is a possibility that a detection sensor will be installed. On the other hand, with a structure in which detection sensors are arranged in the second branch passage, when the second upstream unit is changed to another unit, the number of detection sensors corresponding to the unit is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from making a mistake in the number of the arrangement.

In the gaming machine E6, the first unit includes a second ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a third passage through which a game ball entered into the second ball entrance passes, A detection sensor for detecting a game ball is formed in each of the first unit, the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit, and is formed in the second downstream unit of the third passage. A game machine E7, characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the first unit has a second ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, and a ball is entered into the second ball entrance. A third passage through which a game ball passes is formed over each of the first unit, the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit, and the game ball is passed through a portion of the third passage formed in the second downstream unit. Since the detection sensors for detection are provided, the detection sensors provided in the second unit can be distributed, and the degree of freedom in arranging the passages can be increased accordingly.

In the game machine E7, the second passage is directly or indirectly engaged with the first passage, or the third passage of the first unit and the second unit is directly or indirectly engaged with each other. The game machine E8 is characterized in that the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is performed by matching.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E7, the direct or indirect engagement of the second passage with the first passage, or the third passage of the first unit and the second unit Since the second unit is positioned with respect to the first unit by directly or indirectly engaging the second unit, it is possible to position the second unit even when the second upstream unit of the second unit is changed to another unit. That is, regardless of the form of another unit, the position where the first passage and the second passage are connected or the position where the third passage is connected is the same. or the third passages are directly or indirectly engaged with each other for positioning, even a separate unit can be positioned with respect to the first unit.

Further, the positioning of the second unit with respect to the first unit is intended to suppress the occurrence of a positional deviation (step) in the connecting portion between the first and second passages or the connecting portion between the third passages. , the target portion (the connecting portion between the first and second passages or the connecting portion between the third passages) can be positioned. step) can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the game ball can flow down smoothly.

In any one of the game machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage projects toward the second downstream unit, and the projected A gaming machine E9, wherein a receiving portion for receiving part of the detection sensor is formed in the second downstream unit.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E6 to E8, a part of the detection sensor arranged in the second branch passage of the second upstream passage protrudes toward the second downstream unit. In addition, since a receiving portion for receiving a part of the projecting detection sensor is formed in the second downstream passage, the engagement between the detection sensor and the receiving portion positions the second upstream unit and the second downstream unit. It is possible to reduce the size of the second unit as a whole by suppressing part of the detection sensor from protruding to the outside.

In the gaming machines E1 to E6, the first unit includes a second ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a third path through which a game ball entered into the second ball entrance passes. is formed at least between the second branch passages in the second unit.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E9, the third passage through which the game ball entered into the second ball entrance passes is at least between the second branch passages in the second unit. , the size of the second unit can be reduced.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E10, the second path is formed with a bent portion that is bent from the front to the back of the second unit, and the inner surface of the outer wall of the bent portion is formed. A gaming machine E11 characterized in that a standing portion is erected from the bottom, and the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be positioned on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the flowing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E10, the second path is formed with a bent portion bent from the front to the back of the second unit, and the bent portion A standing portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend in the portion, and the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be positioned on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the flowing direction of the game ball. To make it easier for a player to visually recognize a game ball flowing down a curved part of a passage. That is, the erected portion is erected from the inner surface of the wall portion on the outer side of the bend of the bent portion, thereby increasing the rigidity of the passage and improving the durability, and at the same time, along the erected tip of the erected portion, the game ball can be moved. While it is possible to guide and smoothly flow down the bent portion, since the erected portion is positioned in front of the game ball in a front view, the game ball is hidden in the erected portion and visibility of the game ball is improved. decreases. On the other hand, the wall portion on the outer side of the bend is inclined so as to be located on the back side of the second unit as it goes in the flowing direction of the game ball, thereby ensuring the rigidity and guiding the game ball, while maintaining the standing position. Since the thickness of the installation portion in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention, Taking the Winning Hole Unit 930 and the Ball Throwing Unit 970 as Examples>
A game machine comprising a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member having an upstream end connected to a downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowing down from the first passage member pass. A gaming machine F1 characterized in that at least the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the upstream end of the second passage member are formed in different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. .

Here, a game comprising a first passage member through which game balls pass, and a second passage member whose upstream end is connected to the downstream end of the first passage member and through which game balls flowed down from the first passage member pass. machine is known (for example, JP-A-2012-5783). However, in the structure that connects the first passage member and the second passage member in this way, positional deviation between the two cannot be avoided. There is a problem that a step is formed at the connecting portion of the ball, which may hinder the smooth flow of the game ball.

On the other hand, in the game machine F1, of the upstream ends of at least the second passage member, the bottom surface upstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface upstream end on the side surface side are formed at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball. , the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the bottom surface side (bottom upstream end) and the timing at which the game ball passes through the step on the side surface side (upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side at the same time. can.

In the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine F2 is characterized in that a position spaced apart from the upstream end of the bottom surface by a radius of a game ball is included in the upstream end of the side surface.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, since the side upstream end includes a position separated from the bottom upstream end by the radius of the game ball, the game ball can pass from the first passage member to the second passage member. When rolling (flowing down), such a game ball can be inscribed in the side surface upstream end. That is, the position of the step on the bottom side and the position of the step on the side where the game ball is affected can be reliably made different in the passing direction of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to reliably avoid the influence of the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side of the game ball at the same time, and it is possible to easily disperse the influences, so that the game ball can smoothly flow down (pass through). ).

In the game machine F1 or F2, the bottom surface downstream end on the bottom surface side and the side surface downstream end on the side surface side of the downstream end of the first passage member are formed at different positions in the passage direction of the game ball, The passage member has a protruding piece that protrudes from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member and has a protruding tip that serves as the side downstream end, and the second passage member has an upstream end thereof. A game machine F3, characterized in that it comprises a concave portion which is recessed in and receives the projecting piece and a portion facing the projecting tip of the projecting piece serves as the upstream end of the side wall.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the first passage member protrudes from its downstream end toward the upstream end of the second passage member, and the protruding tip thereof is the side downstream end. In addition, the second passage member has a concave portion which is recessed in its upstream end to receive the projecting piece and whose portion facing the projecting tip of the projecting piece is the side wall upstream end, so that the first passage The lateral downstream end and the bottom downstream end of the member can be adjacent to the lateral upstream end and the lateral downstream end of the second passage member. That is, when the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is formed in a position different from the bottom surface upstream end downstream in the game ball passage direction, the game ball reaches the side surface upstream end of the second passage member. Until then, the game ball can be guided by the projecting piece of the first passage member. Therefore, the game ball can flow down (pass) smoothly.

On the other hand, the projecting piece has relatively low rigidity and may be broken. Even if the protruding piece is broken, the upstream end of the bottom surface and the upstream end of the side surface of the second passage member can be maintained at different positions in the passing direction of the game ball, and the game ball can The timing of passing through the upstream end) and the timing of passing through the step on the side surface (upstream end of the side surface) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being affected by the steps on the bottom surface and the steps on the side at the same time. can.

Further, according to the gaming machine F3, since the game machine projecting piece is formed in the first passage member and the recessed portion is formed in the second passage member, respectively, the side surface of the recessed portion is brought into contact with the projecting piece, thereby The upward displacement of the second passage member with respect to the passage member can be restricted. That is, at the step where the upstream end of the second passage member is higher than the downstream end of the first passage member, the game ball is likely to be bounced up when riding on it, so the opposite step (from the downstream end of the first passage member Also, compared to the step where the upstream end of the second passage member is at a low position), it is easy to hinder the smooth flow down (passage) of the game ball. Therefore, as in the game machine F3, the upward displacement of the second path member with respect to the first path member can be restricted, which means that the upstream end of the second path member is positioned higher than the downstream end of the first path member. It is possible to suppress the formation of steps, which is particularly effective for the smooth flow of game balls.

A game machine F4 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the side upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the side upstream end of the second passage member Compared to the case of forming perpendicularly to the passage direction of the game machine, the game ball that has collided with the upper end surface of the side surface of the second passage member can be made to slide along the slope and be less likely to be bounced back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down).

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F5 is characterized in that at least the entire upstream end of the second passage member is inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, at least the entire upstream end of the second path member is formed to be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball, so that the second path member The side upstream end of the upstream end can be inclined with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. Therefore, compared to the case where the side surface upstream end of the second path member is formed perpendicular to the passing direction of the game machine, the game ball that collides with the side surface upper end surface of the second path member slides along the slope. It can be difficult to be bounced back. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down).

In this case, according to the game machine F5, since the entire upstream end of the second passage member is formed to be inclined, for example, compared to the case where it is formed in a shape (stepped shape) having a projecting piece or a recessed portion , the occurrence of stress concentration can be suppressed, and the durability of the passage member can be ensured. In addition, when the second passage member is made of a resin material, the shape of the cavity of the injection molding die can be moderately changed, so air bubble retention (air entrapment) and insufficient filling can be suppressed. It is possible to improve the quality.

A gaming machine F6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machines F4 and F5, the side upstream end of the second passage member is inclined downward along the passing direction of the gaming machine.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4 or F5, the side surface upstream end of the second passage member is inclined downward along the passage direction of the game machine, so that the side surface of the second passage member A game ball that collides with the upstream end can be pushed to the bottom side. That is, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being bounced up and bound at the side upstream end of the second passage member. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to smoothly pass (flow down).

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the specific winning port unit 550 as an example>
A ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance for opening or closing the ball entrance, and the pair of feather members. and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, wherein the pair of wing members moves from the outside in the opening direction A game machine G1 characterized in that the transmission mechanism is formed so as to be capable of regulating the displacement of the pair of feather members in the opening direction when they are displaced.

Here, a ball entrance formed so that a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members disposed on both sides of the ball entrance, and a driving force applied to the pair of feather members to open or close. When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, they are arranged at the allowable position for allowing the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, and the driving force of the driving means causes the pair of wing members to be opened. A gaming machine is known that includes a restricting means arranged at a restricting position for restricting entry of a game ball into a ball entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of feather members are released by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the allowable position, so that the game ball that has passed between the pair of feather members is inserted into the entrance. You can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of feather members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is placed at the restricting position, so that when the pair of feather members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball enters the ball entrance. You can regulate what is entered.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricted position to the allowable position after forcibly releasing the pair of feather members from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of regulating illegal entry of game balls into the ball entrance is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the pair of wing members are displaced in the opening direction from the outside, the transmission mechanism is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the pair of wing members in the opening direction. It is possible to suppress the forced opening of the feather member. Therefore, illegal entry of game balls into the ball entrance can be easily regulated.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. A protruding portion protrudes from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of feather members. The inner wall of the is recessed with a receiving portion for receiving the projecting portion when the slide member is slid to a position where the blade member is closed, and when the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion , a game machine G2 characterized in that the rotation of the feather member is restricted.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the inner wall of the sliding groove receives the projecting portion when the slide member is slid to the position where the blade member is closed. In a state in which the receiving portion is recessed and the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion, the rotation of the wing member is restricted, so that the wing member can be prevented from being forcibly released from the outside.

A game machine G3, wherein the direction of sliding displacement of said slide member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of said pair of wing members in said game machine G2.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member is substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the pair of wing members, so the wing members are displaced from the outside in the opening direction. Even if the external force is transmitted to the slide member via the projecting portion and the receiving portion, the slide displacement component of the slide member is less likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to suppress the forced opening of the feather member.

Also, the slide member can be arranged substantially parallel to the blade member. As a result, the space required for arranging the blade member and the slide member can be reduced, and the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly.

A gaming machine G4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine G2 or G3, the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion by sliding the slide member downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, the slide member is slid downward in the direction of gravity, so that the projecting portion is received by the receiving portion. (Self-weight) can be used to easily maintain the state in which the projecting portion is received in the receiving portion.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. A protruding portion protrudes from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of feather members, and the rotary member is , an abutment portion, and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the abutment portion, and the slide member is adapted to rotate when the rotary member is rotated toward one side in order to close the blade member. A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion is abutted, and the one-side abutted portion and the one-side abutted portion are opposed to each other with a predetermined gap in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the feather member. a second side abutted portion to which the other side of the abutting portion abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side, and when the feather member is closed, the one side abutted portion , one side of the abutting portion is abutted, the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member, and at least a position where the other side of the abutting portion abuts on the other abutted portion. The game machine G5 is characterized in that when the rotating member is rotated to the other side, the engagement of the projecting portion with the slide member is released.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the rotary member has a contact portion and a projecting portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the blade member. a one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotary member is rotated toward one side, and a predetermined gap in the sliding displacement direction from the one-side abutted portion. and the other side abutted portion which is opposed to the wing member and is contacted by the other side of the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the blade member. When it is rotated to , the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the sliding member is slid toward one side, whereby the blade member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotary member is rotated to the other side, the other side contacted portion is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slidably displaced toward the other side. , the wing members are released.

In this case, when the blade member is closed, one side of the abutting portion is abutted against the abutted portion on one side and the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member. The sliding displacement of the slide member to the other side is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated to the other side at least to a position where the other side of the contacting portion contacts the other side contacted portion, the engagement of the overhanging portion with the slide member is released. By rotating the member further to the other side, the sliding member can be slidably displaced toward the other side, and the wing member can be released.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a slide member slidably displaced as the rotating member rotates. A protruding portion protrudes from one of the members, and a sliding groove through which the protruding portion is slidably inserted is recessed in the slide member or the other of the pair of feather members, and the rotary member is , an abutment portion, and an overhanging portion projecting from the tip of the abutment portion, and the slide member is adapted to rotate when the rotary member is rotated toward one side in order to close the blade member. A one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion is abutted, and the one-side abutted portion and the one-side abutted portion are opposed to each other with a predetermined gap in the direction of the slide displacement, and the rotation is performed to open the feather member. a second abutted portion to which the other side of the abutting portion abuts when the member is rotated toward the other side; When the slide member is slidably displaced from a state in which the member is disengaged and the feather member is closed to a position where the one-side contact portion is in contact with one side of the contact portion. , the game machine G6, wherein the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of the game machine G1, the rotating member has a contact portion and a projecting portion projecting from the tip of the contact portion, and the slide member closes the blade member. a one-side abutted portion with which one side of the abutting portion abuts when the rotary member is rotated toward one side, and a predetermined gap in the sliding displacement direction from the one-side abutted portion. and the other side abutted portion which is opposed to the wing member and is contacted by the other side of the abutting portion when the rotating member is rotated toward the other side to open the blade member. When it is rotated to , the one-side contacted portion is pushed by one side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the sliding member is slid toward one side, whereby the blade member is closed. On the other hand, when the rotary member is rotated to the other side, the other side contacted portion is pushed by the other side of the contact portion along with the rotation, and the slide member is slidably displaced toward the other side. , the wing members are released.

In this case, when the slide member is slidably displaced from a state in which the blade member is closed to a position where the one-side contact portion abuts against one side of the contact portion, the projecting portion is engaged with the slide member. Therefore, it is restricted to slide the slide member to the other side without rotating the rotating member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the wing member from being forcibly released from the outside.

On the other hand, when the blade member is closed, the projecting portion is disengaged from the slide member. A wing member can be opened. Here, when the wing member is closed and the overhang is engaged with the slide member, the shape of the overhang and the one-side abutting portion can allow the rotating member to rotate to the other side. It is necessary to form it into an appropriate shape, and the shape becomes complicated. Therefore, there is a possibility that not only the strength will be lowered, but also the engagement will be easily released. On the other hand, as in the present invention, when the blade member is closed, the overhanging portion is disengaged from the slide member, so that the shapes of the overhanging portion and the one-side contact portion are rotated. The member need not be shaped to allow rotation to the other side. Therefore, not only can the shape be simplified and the strength can be ensured, but also a shape that facilitates holding the engagement can be adopted, making it difficult for the engagement to be released.

In any one of the game machines G2 to G6, in a state in which a passage member forming a passage for a game ball entered into the ball entrance is provided, and the projecting portion is not inserted into the sliding groove, the above-mentioned A gaming machine G7, wherein a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G2 to G6, it is equipped with a passage member that forms a passage for the game ball entered into the ball entrance, and the protruding portion is not in contact with the sliding groove. In the inserted state, a part of the slide member is arranged in the passage of the passage member. The sliding member can regulate the falling game ball.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the winning port unit 930 as an example>
A ball entrance into which a game ball can be entered, a pair of feather members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance for opening or closing the ball entrance, and the pair of feather members. and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of feather members, wherein a game ball entered into the ball entrance and a part of the transmission mechanism traverses the passage of the passage member when the feather member is displaced from the open position to the closed position.

Here, a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a pair of feather members rotatably supported at positions across the ball entrance for opening or closing the ball entrance, and a pair of feather members for opening or closing the ball entrance A game machine is known that includes driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the wing members and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to a pair of wing members (for example, JP-A-2010- 234009). The transmission mechanism includes a rotating member rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the blade member is opened or closed as the rotating member is rotated toward one side or the other side.

In this case, for example, the tip of the string is adhered to the game ball, the game ball is entered from the ball entrance and passed through the passage of the passage member, and when the game ball reaches the detection position of the detection sensor, the string There is a fraudulent act that causes the detection sensor to detect multiple times by operating (pulling out, attracting) the other end of the game ball to make the game ball reciprocate. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to effectively suppress cheating by adhering the tip of the string to the game ball and causing the detection sensor to detect the same multiple times.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, when the feather member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, part of the transmission mechanism traverses the passage of the passage member, so that the thread whose tip is adhered to the game ball is in the middle. The transmission mechanism can at least interfere with the part. As a result, by making the game ball reciprocate, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of causing the detection sensor to detect the game ball multiple times.

In the gaming machine H1, the transmission mechanism causes the slide member to traverse the passage of the passage member and the slide member to rub against the edge of the passage member when displacing the blade member from the open position to the closed position. A game machine H2 characterized by comprising a friction contact portion.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism allows the slide member to traverse the passage of the passage member when displacing the blade member from the open position to the closed position, and the slide member crosses the passage member. Since the edge portion is provided with the friction contact portion, it is possible to cut off an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage through the ball entrance.

That is, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing member opened, when the wing member is displaced from the open position to the closed position and the rubbing contact portion of the slide member crosses the passage of the passage member, A middle portion of the string whose tip is adhered to the game ball is displaced together with the friction contact portion and pressed against the edge of the passage member, and when the friction contact portion is rubbed against the edge of the passage member, the friction contact portion and the edge of the passage member. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

In addition, it is preferable to form the friction contact portion of the slide member from a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion (rubbing contact portion) of the slide member may be made of a metal material. The same applies to the passage member, and the entire passage member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion of the passage member (the portion where the friction contact portion is in friction contact) may be made of a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the friction contact portion and the portion (the edge of the passage member) with which the friction contact portion is in friction contact are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine H1, the transmission mechanism includes a pair of cutting members that traverse the passage of the passage member and rub their edges together when the feather members are displaced from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine H3 characterized by:

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, when the wing members are displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pair of wing members cross the passage of the passage member and rub the edges of each other. Since the cutting member is provided in the transmission mechanism, it is possible to cut an illegal object illegally inserted into the passage through the entrance.

That is, even if the above-described game ball is entered with the wing members opened, when the wing members are displaced from the open position to the closed position and the pair of cutting members cross the passage of the passage member, A midway portion of the thread, the tip of which is adhered to the game ball, can be cut by being sandwiched between a pair of cutting members. As a result, the fraudulent act described above can be suppressed.

Note that the pair of cutting members is preferably made of a metal material. In this case, the entire slide member may be made of a metal material, or only a portion of the slide member (edges that are in frictional contact with each other) may be made of a metal material. Moreover, it is preferable that the portions of the pair of cutting members that are in frictional contact with each other are formed as blades (cutting blades).

In the game machine H2 or H3, the driving means displaces the drive shaft in a first direction by electromagnetic force and displaces the drive shaft in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The blade member is formed as a solenoid actuator operated by the elastic recovery force of the force means, and the displacement of the blade member from the open position to the closed position is carried out by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. A game machine H4 characterized by.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2 or H3, the displacement of the wing member from the open position to the closed position is performed by displacing the drive shaft of the drive means in the first direction. That is, since it is performed using electromagnetic force, the driving force can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily cut off an illegal object (for example, a string) between the friction contact portion of the slide member and the edge portion of the passage member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Plate Member 620 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A light-transmitting member made of a light-transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light-transmitting member with light, wherein light is incident from the side end surface of the light-transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiation means is increased. A game machine I1 characterized by comprising an output increasing means for increasing the output, and the output increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light-transmitting member made of a light-transmitting material in a plate shape and having a reflecting portion is provided, and light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light-transmitting member is provided. A game machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflective portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of game machine, for example, by arranging the light transmission member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the display of the liquid crystal display device can be seen by the player through the light transmission member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined game state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is made to enter from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. to emit from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to float (display) a pattern or design on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it is difficult to make (display) the pattern or pattern clearly stand out. In this case, increasing the output of the light irradiation means not only increases the cost and power consumption, but also increases the amount of heat generated, which causes a problem that other members and equipment are affected by the heat.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since it is provided with an emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmission member in the light emitted from the light irradiation means, the light reflected by the reflection portion It is possible to intensify the light emitted from the front of the transmissive member. As a result, patterns and patterns can be clearly highlighted (displayed). Moreover, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and accordingly, deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed.

In addition, the formation position of the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member may be, for example, the rear surface of the light transmitting member, or may be inside the light transmitting member.

The game machine I2 in the game machine I1 is characterized in that the emission increasing means comprises an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member.

According to the game machine I2, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is emitted onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made incident from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the amount of light that is incident on the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member is reduced accordingly. Light collection efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light reaching the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member out of the light irradiated from the light irradiation means, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member can be increased. , patterns and designs can be made to stand out (display) clearly. Moreover, since there is no need to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this way, the emission increasing means is provided with an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, so that when another device in the game area emits light In this case, the outer edge member blocks the light from the other device, so that the light can be suppressed from entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when no light is incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmitting member), light from other devices is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the display of a pattern or design on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine I2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmissive member.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front and back sides of the light transmitting member, respectively. The light that is not directly incident on the side end face and goes off to the front side of the light transmitting member and the light that goes off to the back side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and is made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be increased accordingly.

Furthermore, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back sides of the light transmission member, even if the light emitted by other devices in the game area reaches from either the front side or the back side of the light transmission member, , the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface can block the light, so that the incident light from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member can be suppressed. Therefore, when the light irradiating means is turned off (when no light is incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmitting member), light from other devices is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent a pattern or design from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

A game machine I4 in which the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end face of the light transmission member in the game machine I2 or I3.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effects of the game machine I2 or I3, the outer edge member is arranged to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmission member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiation means can be emitted. , the light can be reflected by the overhanging portion of the outer edge member (the surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) so that the light can be easily incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be increased accordingly.

A game machine I5 characterized in that in any one of the game machines I2 to I4, the outer edge member is made of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I5, in the effect of any one of the game machines I2 to I4, since the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmission member, the incident light from the side end surface of the light transmission member Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

That is, for example, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are made of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It easily permeates to the outer edge member. The light transmitted through the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (the boundary with the air), and then returns to the light transmitting member. includes not only those traveling toward the reflecting portions of the light-transmitting member, but also those traveling toward the side end surfaces of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflector is reduced. On the other hand, as in the game machine I4, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member is transmitted between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary between and, so that the light reaching the reflecting portion can be ensured.

A gaming machine I6 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmission member.

According to the gaming machine I6, the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap between the front or back surface of the light transmitting member and the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5. The light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected on the front or rear surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

That is, for example, when the refractive indices of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, light from the side end face of the light transmitting member The incident light is less likely to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and more likely to be transmitted through the outer edge member. The light transmitted through the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) by the outer surface of the outer edge portion (the boundary with the air), and then returns to the light transmitting member. includes not only those traveling toward the reflecting portions of the light-transmitting member, but also those traveling toward the side end surfaces of the light-transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflector is reduced. On the other hand, as in the gaming machine I5, by arranging the outer edge member in a state in which a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member. Since the reflected light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the front or back (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines I2 to I6, a rotation mechanism is provided to rotatably support the light transmission member and to apply a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. , a curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear that meshes with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and rotates the pinion gear. and a driving means.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines I2 to I6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved on the outer edge member, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshing with the curved rack gear on the outer edge member, and a drive means for rotating the pinion gear. Rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, thereby rotating the light transmitting member together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and patterns displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member serves both to condense the light emitted from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and to transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

In any one of the game machines I2 to I7, a rotation mechanism is provided to rotatably support the light transmission member and apply a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A game machine I8 characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of its annular outer peripheral surface, and the rotating mechanism comprises a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines I2 to I7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotary mechanism is provided with a plurality of supporting rings guided along the guide grooves, the light transmitting member is exposed to the light through the action of the guide grooves and the supporting rings. The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state in which light can enter from the side end surfaces of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light-transmitting member, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light-transmitting member can be viewed by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can serve both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiation means onto the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

The support ring may be rotatably pivoted, or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as a mode in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a rotatably supported support wheel rolls or slides along the guide groove. A form in which a fixed support wheel slides along a guide groove is exemplified.

In addition, in the game machine I8 which is subordinate to the game machine I7, the outer edge member having the curved rack gear engraved is placed on either the front or the back of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member having the guide groove recessed is placed on the light transmitting member. Preferably, they are arranged on the other of the front or back, respectively. That is, by arranging the outer edge member on the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member, respectively, the light emitted from the light irradiation means does not directly enter the side end surfaces of the light transmission member, This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the rear side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front side and the outer edge member on the back side, respectively, and enter from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member. In addition, by arranging the outer edge member on each of the front side and the back side of the light transmission member in this way, the light emitted by other devices in the game area reaches from either the front side or the back side of the light transmission member. Even in such a case, the light can be blocked by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and can be suppressed from being incident from the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member.

In the game machine I8, the outer edge member is formed so that its outer peripheral side faces the front or rear surface of the light transmission member with a predetermined gap, and the opposing space between the outer edge member and the light transmission member is the guide. A gaming machine I9 characterized by a groove.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effects of the game machine I8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front or back of the light transmission member with a predetermined gap, and the outer edge member and the light transmission member are formed. Since a guide groove is provided between and facing each other, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure composed of the light-transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, by making one inner wall of the guide groove bear on the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, the outer edge member does not need to be formed to have a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure described above.

In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed with a predetermined gap formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member is directed to the front surface of the light transmission member. Alternatively, it can be made easier to reflect on the back surface (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

In any one of game machines I2 to I9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has a direction in which light is irradiated from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine I10 characterized in that the gaming machine I10 is arranged so that the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the game machine I10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines I2 to I9, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are formed perpendicular to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means emits the light. Since the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of the light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated from the light irradiation means. It is possible to easily reflect the light incident from the front or rear surface of the light transmission member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be made to reach the reflecting portion more easily, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the patterns and designs are made clear. It can be made to appear (displayed).

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Irradiation Unit 650 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising: a target member to be irradiated with light; and a plurality of light-emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture in which each of the light-emitting surfaces faces the target member, wherein the plurality of light-emitting means One or a plurality of elastically deformable substrate members on which at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture Characteristic game machine J1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a target member to be irradiated with light and a plurality of light emitting means arranged in a posture in which each of the irradiation surfaces faces the target member (for example, JP-A-2015 -29735). According to this game machine, by irradiating light from the light emitting means and making it enter from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting section. The light can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member from a light-transmissive material in a disc shape and forms a reflecting portion, and at the same time, arranges a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disc shape (target member). in such a manner as to surround the object member in a posture directed toward the object, and a structure in which the light emitted from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the object member was devised (unknown at the time of filing of the present application).

However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it was newly found that there is a problem that a plurality of light-emitting means must be arranged around the target member, and therefore the arrangement work is troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to arrange the plurality of light-emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, they are oriented in different directions), the arrangement work is also troublesome from this point of view. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine J1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of board members formed to be elastically deformable, and the board members are held in a predetermined posture in which the board members are elastically deformed. Since the base member is provided, by arranging one substrate member on the base member, the work of arranging at least two or more light emitting means can be completed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the installation work of the light emitting means.

Further, when the substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is elastically deformed and held in a predetermined posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose a plurality of light-emitting means with their irradiation surfaces facing the outer peripheral surface of the target member individually, the work of disposing the light-emitting means can be reduced from this point as well.

A game machine J2, wherein the game machine J1 comprises a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and which is disposed on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. Also, it is possible to suppress warpage and bending of the substrate member and to easily regulate the attitude of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be restrained from being affected by the warpage or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be easily maintained.

In the game machine J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member where the block body is arranged.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J2, since the light emitting means is arranged in the area where the block bodies are arranged in the board member, the posture of the light emitting means is the same as the warp of the board member. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be more easily maintained.

In the gaming machine J2 or J3, a plurality of the blocks are arranged on the substrate member at predetermined intervals, and the substrate member located between the blocks is elastically deformed so as to move the base. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being held by the body.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J2 or J3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board member at predetermined intervals, and the board members positioned between the block bodies are elastically arranged. Since the substrate member is held in a deformed (bent) posture by the base member, the posture of the light emitting means (the direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized compared to the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any one of game machines J2 to J4, the light-emitting means is disposed on the front surface of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is disposed on the substrate member on the side opposite to the target member. A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is arranged on the opposite side of the target member. Since it is disposed on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the object member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

The game machine J6 is characterized in that, in the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front surface of the substrate member.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effects of the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front of the board member, and the head of the screw protrudes from the front of the board member, so that the light emitting means can be used. It can be protected by the head of the screw. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front side of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member to prevent damage due to contact with the light emitting means.

The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effects of the game machine J5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. By arranging the light emitting means between the heads of the screws arranged in this way, it is possible to easily bring the movable member into contact with the head of the screw, and to easily protect the light emitting means.

In any one of the game machines J2 to J7, one of the base body and the block body has a projection, and the other of the base body and the block body has a fitting hole into which the projection is received and fitted. A game machine J8 characterized in that it is recessed in.

According to the game machine J8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines J2 to J7, one of the base body and the block body is provided with a projection, and a fitting that receives and fits the projection is provided. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body and the block body, by fitting the projection into the fitting hole, the block body can be arranged on the base body, and labor for the arrangement work can be reduced. . In particular, when a plurality of blocks are arranged on a substrate member, and the blocks are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture, one of the blocks is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), the substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

In any one of the game machines J2 to J8, the block body has a concave portion on a side thereof arranged on the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block member accommodates an electronic component arranged on the substrate member. A gaming machine J9 characterized in that:

According to the gaming machine J9, in any one of the gaming machines J2 to J8, the block body has a concave portion on the side thereof arranged on the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block member is arranged on the substrate member. Since the electronic parts are housed, the electronic parts can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the movable member from coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Vertical Displacement Unit 800 as an Example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member for displacement. In the machine, an elastic member is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position under the action of gravity. In a state in which the displacement member is disposed on the base member so as to be displaced in a direction, and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A game machine K1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. There is known a gaming machine that performs an effect by displacing a displacing member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed at a retracted position (for example, one of the first position or the second position) that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area, while a predetermined game When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the other of the first position and the second position) overhanging the game area, and the motion of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played. A production that makes the person visually recognize is performed. However, in the game machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the drive means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the displacement member is provided with an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. When the displacement member is displaced in a direction toward position 2 and is displaced from the driving means to the displacement member, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravitational force acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, a reciprocating displacement (approximately a single vibration ) can be performed by the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravitational direction can be the orthographic projection of uniform circular motion, and the displacement speed can be varied.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied to the displacement member from the driving means, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-described displacement (orthographic projection of uniform circular motion). can be increased, and variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, simply by switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, it is possible to increase the variation of the displacement, and there is no need to complicate the structure and control, thus reducing the product cost and improving the reliability. can be improved.

In the game machine K1, the displacement member is formed such that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side moves up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine K2.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, one end side is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member, and the other end side is raised and lowered between the first position and the second position. When the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released and the displacement member is made to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately single vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, such The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only vertical linear motion but also rotational motion centered on the one end side. As a result, it is possible to make such displacement members perform interesting displacements.

In the game machine K2, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is a rotating member that is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. and a connecting member whose one end is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and whose other end is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K2, the transmission means includes a rotating member rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a rotating member eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member. and a connecting member whose one end is connected to the position where the displacement member is positioned and whose other end is connected to the displacement member. When the displacement member is caused to perform reciprocating displacement (approximately simple vibration) by force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member can be changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the pushing/pulling direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocatingly displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed, Such a displacement member can be made to perform interesting displacements.

In the gaming machine K3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are in balance, the direction connecting the rotation center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member A game machine K4 characterized in that a direction connecting a connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and a connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially perpendicular to each other.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at equilibrium (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in either direction of push or pull from equilibrium. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocatingly displaced, the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balanced position, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member has a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position within the movable range between the first position and the second position is provided. When the displacement member is displaced in the central side range including A gaming machine K5 characterized in that, when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to , the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact therewith.

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3 or K4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member has a projecting portion projecting toward the other, When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the predetermined position of the movable range, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is positioned at the first position or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, so the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is canceled. When the displacement member is caused to reciprocate about the balanced position (predetermined position), it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range, thereby smoothing the reciprocation of the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, in the outer range, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member and the connecting member so as to be able to contact and rotate. Rattling between the member and the connecting member can be suppressed.

In the game machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to include the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine K6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the protruding portion is used to suppress looseness between the rotating member and the connecting member, thereby adjusting the posture of the displacement member. While being stabilized, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position toward the second position by the driving force of the driving means, the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion can be avoided, so that the displacement member is acted upon. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while also utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is projected toward the center of the game area. , At the first position (retracted position), it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member, improve the appearance and improve durability, and suppress obstruction of the performance of other members. When displacing the from the first position toward the second position (overhanging position), it is possible to rapidly overhang (displace) to the second position, and the effect of the overhanging operation can be enhanced. .

In the game machine K6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are positioned substantially on a straight line. A game machine K7.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially aligned. Since it is positioned on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is the direction toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction to rotate the rotating member is generated. A condition that does not occur (ie dead center) can be created. Therefore, when displacing the displacement member toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, and to displace the displacement member smoothly (quickly). After being arranged at the position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the displacement member due to the action of the dead point described above, thereby improving the appearance and improving the durability.

In any one of the game machines K3 to K7, the connection member includes a contact portion formed to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion corresponds to a connection position between the displacement member and the base member and the rotation position. It is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Game machine K8.

According to the game machine K8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K3 to K7, the connection member has an abutment portion formed to be able to abut against the base member, and the abutment portion includes the displacement member and the base. Since it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. , when the displacement member rattles with respect to the base member, the abutting portion of the connecting member is brought into contact with the base member, so that the connecting portion between the rotating member and the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member are rotatable). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to the. As a result, the driving force of the drive means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the driving means comprises first driving means and second driving means. and two driving means, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means. A gaming machine L1 characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in different manners.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and which performs an effect by displacing the displacement member. (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is arranged at a retracted position that is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area. An effect is performed in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position, and the player visually recognizes the motion of the displaced member displaced toward the extended position.

However, the conventional game machine has a problem that the effect of the presentation by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional game machine, the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, so the production by the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. As a result, it is difficult to perform an effect that surprises the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is increased or decreased, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means. Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means, the effect of the presentation by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one way, the effect is not one pattern, and one displacement member is used in at least two ways. Since it can be displaced in the same displacement mode, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player by switching the displacement mode.

In the gaming machine L1, a first member slidably disposed on the base member and driven by the first driving means, and a first member slidably displaceable on the base member and driven by the second driving means and a second member driven by a second member, wherein the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. .

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the first member slidably displaceably arranged on the base member and driven by the first drive means and the first member slidably displaceably arranged on the base member and a second member driven by the second drive means, wherein the first and second portions of the displacement member are at least rotatably coupled to the first and second members, respectively, so that the When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the driving force of the second driving means causes the second member to slide. When the member is slidably displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine L2, the two displacement modes are not formed by having the same center of rotation and different directions of rotation, but are formed with different directions of rotation and different centers of rotation. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, making it easier to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In the game machine L2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from either the first portion of the displacement member or the first member is provided. A gaming machine L3 characterized by being rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first portion of the displacement member and the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the driving force of the first driving means linearly displaces the first member or the driving force of the second driving means. Depending on whether the second member is linearly displaced by the above, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed. can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, there is no need for a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement along a curved trajectory. Therefore, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are curvedly displaced. ), for example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be utilized and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operational reliability.

A gaming machine L4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine L3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects of the game machine L3, since the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel, the first driving means or the second driving means In addition to a displacement mode in which only one of the driving means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, both the first driving means and the second driving means are driven to linearly displace (e.g., traverse) the entire displacement member. Embodiments can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, by switching the displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the game machine L4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation are made different, and the kind of displacement itself is made different. (that is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, making it easier to surprise the player.

In the gaming machine L4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member is different from the displacement speed of the second member. A gaming machine L5 characterized in that it is set to a speed.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed of the member is set to a different displacement speed, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be displaced (linearly moved) parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, and can also be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacing member in a displacing manner in which such rotary motion and linear motion are combined in the conventional configuration in which the displacing member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one driving means. , like the present invention, it has become possible for the first time to utilize two driving means.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L5, a second displacement member is disposed displaceably on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Game machine L6.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L5, the second displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the second displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state. , the device (variation) between the displacement mode by the first driving means and the displacement mode by the second driving means can be enlarged. Therefore, by switching the displacement mode, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Projection Unit 5600 as an Example>
In a game machine comprising a target member to be irradiated with light and light irradiation means for irradiating the target member with light, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are displaceable. , a game machine M1 characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both of them.

Here, a game comprising a displacement member displaceably formed between a first position and a second position and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member, and performing an effect by displacing the displacement member. machine is known (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this game machine, a light irradiation means (LED) is provided inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a translucent material is provided on the front surface (the surface facing the player) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light portion from the back side by the light irradiation means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (light-transmitting portion) emits light. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the light irradiating means irradiates the target member in a constant manner, there is little change in the manner in which the player visually recognizes it, and there is a problem that it is difficult to make the game interesting.

On the other hand, according to the game machine M1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are displaceable, and the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both. It is possible to change the mode of visual recognition by the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested.

Examples of the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed include a form in which the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation means is changed, and a form in which the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation means to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. Examples include a form in which two parts are combined, a form in which these are combined, and the like.

A gaming machine M2 comprising a base member in the gaming machine M1, wherein the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member. The target wiring can be kept in a fixed state, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

In the gaming machine M2, a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is illuminated by light. It is formed in a plate shape from a transmissive material and is formed with a reflecting portion, and the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. A gaming machine M3 characterized by:

Here, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or pattern.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2, a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, it is possible for the player to visually recognize different portions of the target member through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first group out of a plurality of groups constituting the reflective part can be visually recognized through the opening, and a second group, which is a group different from the first group, is the opening. When the target member is displaceable between a second position and a second position that is visible through While allowing the player to visually recognize the formed first pattern or pattern, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. , to a second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

In this case, since the target member is made of a light-transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or design visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the gaming machine M3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotatably disposed on the base member about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape. Game machine M4 to play.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and can rotate about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Therefore, compared with the case where the target member can be slidably displaced, the target member is arranged while securing the number of patterns and patterns that are visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. can reduce the space required for

In the gaming machine M2, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a reflecting portion, and receives light emitted from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end surface. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. , the game machine M5, wherein the target member is rotatably disposed on the base member with the center of the circular shape as the center of rotation.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M6, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape and is provided with a reflective portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and is projected from the side end face. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and patterns displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. can.

In the game machine M5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the center of rotation of the target member.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machine M5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, so that the rotation position of the target member ( irrespective of the phase), the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily made constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

A gaming machine M7 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M1, a base member is provided, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member. It is possible to increase the variation of changes in the irradiation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further change the manner in which the player visually recognizes, and it is possible to make the player more interested.

In the gaming machine M7, a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace the target member is provided, and the light irradiation means is brought into contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving means. A gaming machine M8 characterized in that it is displaced together with the target member.

According to the game machine M8, in addition to the effects of the game machine M7, the driving means for applying a driving force to the target member to displace the object member is provided, and the light irradiation means displaces the object by the driving force applied from the driving means. Since the member is displaced together with the target member when the member is brought into contact with the target member, it can be used as a drive unit for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a drive unit for displacing the light irradiation unit. can.

Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and A game machine K1 in any one of M1 to M8, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and A game machine K2 in any one of M1 to M8, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A16, B1 to B15, C1 to C10, D1 to D15, E1 to E11, F1 to F6, G1 to G7, H1 to H4, I1 to I10, J1 to J9, K1 to K8, L1 to L6 and A game machine K3 in any one of M1 to M8, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, a first driving means for driving the first opening/closing member, a second ball entrance, and the second ball entrance A gaming machine is known that includes a second opening/closing member that opens or closes a mouth, and a second driving means that drives the second opening/closing member (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2011-177416). .
However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to effectively utilize the space.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of effectively utilizing the space.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 includes a first ball entrance, a first opening/closing member for opening or closing the first ball entrance, and a first opening/closing member for driving the first opening/closing member. a driving means, a second ball entrance, a second opening/closing member for opening or closing the second ball entrance, and a second driving means for driving the second opening/closing member; A first driving means and a second driving means are arranged on the back side of the second opening/closing member.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the front projected area of the second opening/closing member is larger than the front projected area of the first opening/closing member.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the front projection area of the second opening/closing member is larger than the total front projection area of the first driving means and the second driving means. be enlarged.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to effectively utilize the space.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the dead space on the back surface of the second opening/closing member can be effectively utilized.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the dead space on the back surface of the second opening/closing member can be effectively utilized.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board
60 base plate (game board)
60a through hole (opening)
64 1st prize gate (1st aisle)
140 second winning entrance (ball entrance, first ball entrance)
65a specific winning entrance (2nd ball entrance)
410 base member
420L left displacement member (displacement member)
420R right displacement member (displacement member)
422 connecting hole (first part or second part)
423 sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 truck member (first member or second member)
481 first drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 projecting member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L lower left rack (first member or second member)
488R lower right rack (first member or second member)
488b drive pin (connecting pin)
491 second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610, 5610, 6610 base member
611, 5611, 6612 rear base (base member)
612, 5612 front base (base member)
612g holding pin (protrusion)
6612p aperture
6612r shielding member
620, 2620 , 3620, 5620, 6620 projection plate member (target member, light transmission member)
622, 6622 Reflector
630, 3630 gear member (outer edge member, radiation increasing means)
631 teeth (curved rack gear)
640, 2640 , 3640 grooving member (outer edge member, output increasing means)
641, 2641 guide groove
651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiation means)
652 board member
653 first block (block body)
653b1 insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 second block (block body)
654b1 insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 drive motor (driving means)
820 front base (part of base member)
830 rear base (part of base member)
850 displacement member
863 transmission gear (rotating member)
863c projection
870 connecting member
880 drive motor (driving means)
940 front unit (first member, first unit)
941 rear base (fixing member)
942c second ball feeding part (a part of the first passage member)
943 front base (body member)
943a rolling portion (first passage, part of first passage member)
945 feather member (first opening/closing member)
945b projection (protruding portion)
951 plate member (second opening/closing member, opening/closing member)
953a1 opening (entrance)
953a2 rolling surface
953c annular projection (seat)
954b recess (guide groove)
954c protrusion (second guide means)
954c2 side part
954c3 side edge
954d standing wall (first guide means)
954d1 second guide surface (first inclined surface)
954d2 second side edge (side edge)
955 passage member (case member)
955a concave portion (passage member)
957a1 main body
957a2 shaft (drive shaft)
960 drive unit (third member)
961a body
961b shaft (drive shaft)
962e arm (second engaging portion)
962f wall (covering surface)
962g projecting portion (first engaging portion)
140 second winning entrance (ball entrance, second ball entrance)
965, 18965 transmission member (rotating member, part of first transmission mechanism)
965a tip (a part of the first part)
965b rotating part (part of the first part)
965c rotary shaft
965d protrusion (second part)
965e insertion portion (contact portion)
966, 8966, 11966, 12966, 14966, 18966 displacement member (slide member, part of first transmission mechanism)
966a2, 8966a2 sliding groove
966a5 inclined surface
8966a6 recess (receiving part)
966b2 one side contacted part
966b3 other side contacted part
11968c, 18996g blade part (friction contact part)
12966c2 second blade (part of cutting member)
6683 blade (part of cutting member)
970 throwing unit (second unit)
980 distribution unit (second member, second upstream unit)
981b side wall (second passage, second passage member, third passage)
982b inclined part (bending part)
982h1, 982j1 guide part (upright part)
985e1, 985f1 inflow passage (second connecting passage)
900 passage unit (second downstream unit)
991c1, 991d1 concave portion (receiving portion)
TR0 throwing passage (part of second passage, second upstream passage)
TR1 first passage (part of second passage, second branch passage)
TR2 second passage (part of second passage, second branch passage)
SE1 detection device (detection sensor)
SE3 detection device (detection sensor)
SE4 detection device (detection sensor)
HS1 wiring
HS2 wiring
HS3 wiring
SP biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 screws
C color (support ring)
θ1 first drive range (outer range)
θ2 second drive range (central range)

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
612 front base (front member)
620 projection plate member (light transmission member)
622 reflector
6 40 groove forming member (outer edge member)
651 LED (light irradiation means)

Claims (1)

A light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating a side end surface of the light transmitting member with light, wherein light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member,
an outer edge member having a front surface positioned closer to the front side than the front surface of the light transmitting member and arranged along an outer edge portion of the light transmitting member;
a front member formed so as to be able to shield a part of the light transmission member and the outer edge member in a front view;
In the display area, which is an area not blocked by the front member when viewed from the front, the light transmitting member is visible when viewed from the front,
The outer edge member is configured so that the light irradiated from the light irradiation means to the outer edge member can enter the light transmitting member outside the display area,
At least part of the outer edge member is arranged closer to the light irradiation means than the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a front view,
A gaming machine, wherein a predetermined gap is formed between the light irradiation means and the light transmitting member.

Images